JP6991599B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, when the gaming medium wins a prize in the starting area provided in the gaming area, the decorative variable display device (image display device) displays the identification information (identification symbol) in a variable manner, and the identification information is variablely displayed. When the display result becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), it is controlled to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the first specific gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the probability that the display result becomes the specific display result after the end of the specific gaming state shifts to the high probability state is higher than the normal probability state. There is a second specific gaming state in which the probability that the display result becomes the specific display result after the end of the state shifts to the normal probability state.

Further, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is controlled to the specific effect mode after the end of the first specific game state, and ends the specific effect mode when the second specific effect state is reached during the specific effect mode.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-120904

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that the interest in gaming is poor.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming in view of the above background.

A plurality of gaming machines of the present invention are displayed in the display means (image display device 13) in a gaming machine that executes a special game determination as to whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition. Compared to the effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect using the identification symbols (special effect symbols Z1 to Z3) and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state) after the end of the special game. Then, the specific game state setting means (main CPU101a) for setting the specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and the operation means (effect button 17A, effect lever) that the player can operate. 91), and when the effect control means is controlled in the normal gaming state, the effect control means executes a first reach effect (for example, a loss special reach 1 (A-027)) in the variable effect. When it is possible and controlled in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a second reach effect (for example, a winning special reach (B1-022)) different from the first reach effect in the variable effect. The operation means (effect button 17A) is more when the second reach effect in which the special game is executed is executed than in the case where the first reach effect in which the special game is not executed is executed. It is easy to perform a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates in a predetermined mode without operating the effect lever 91), and the operating means are different from the first operating means (effect button 17A) and the first operating means. There is an operation means (effect lever 19A), and the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means is performed when the second reach effect is executed than when the first reach effect is executed. (Determining effect) is easy to be executed, and the vibration effect is characterized in that it is executed without an operation effect for encouraging the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for big hit winning, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for small hit winning, and (c) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for losing. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for the first big hit game, and (c) is a diagram showing a big winning opening opening / closing control table for the second big hit game. (D) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a third big hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a small hit game control table, and (b) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a game condition data determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 1st to 30th variation in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the variation 31st to 74th times in a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 75th to 84th variation in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. (A) is a diagram representing a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. The figure, (e) is the figure which shows the auxiliary game control table, and (f) is the figure which shows the 2nd start opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area, and (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area. The figure which shows the structure, (d) is a figure which shows the structure of each storage part of a normal symbol hold storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead effect determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the variation effect pattern determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect type determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the telop notice effect determination process in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the transition destination effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special game effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a menu screen. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the transition destination effect mode setting table. It is a figure which shows the final mode determination table 1 (the effect mode A). It is a figure which shows the final mode determination table 2 (the effect mode B, E). It is a figure which shows the final mode determination table 3 (the effect mode C). It is a figure which shows the final mode determination table 4 (the effect mode D). It is a figure which shows the final mode determination table 5 (the effect mode F). It is a figure which shows the hold transition pattern determination table (the first start port). It is a figure which shows the hold transition pattern determination table (the second start port). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 1 (effect mode A). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 2 (effect mode B1). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 3 (effect mode C1). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 4 (effect mode D1). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 5 (effect mode E1). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 6 (effect mode B2). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 7 (effect mode C2). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 8 (effect mode D2). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 9 (effect mode E2). It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table 10 (effect mode F). It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of an effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B1. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of an effect mode B1. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B2. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of the effect mode B2. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode F. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of an effect mode F. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio output determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the degree of the jackpot expectation degree of a specific production. Telop notice pattern judgment table 1 (directing mode B) Telop notice pattern judgment table 2 (directing mode C) Telop notice pattern judgment table 3 (directing mode D) Telop notice pattern judgment table 4 (directing mode E) Telop notice pattern judgment table 5 (directing mode F) (A) to (f) are diagrams showing a special game effect pattern determination table in each effect mode, and (g) is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table when all VS reach is stored. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the ending effect pattern determination table in each effect mode, and (g) is a diagram showing the ending effect pattern determination table when all VS reach is stored. It is a time chart diagram of the variation effect in the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode A. (A) is a time chart diagram of the variable effect in the effect mode B1, and (b) is a time chart diagram of the variable effect in the effect mode C1. (A) is a time chart diagram of the variable effect in the effect mode D1, and (b) is a time chart diagram of the variable effect in the effect mode E1. It is a time chart diagram of the variation effect in the effect mode F. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode B1. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode B1. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode F. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode F. It is a figure which shows an example of the production image in the production mode F. (A) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the normal effect button, (b) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the effect button at the time of a specific effect, and (c). Is a diagram for schematically explaining a state in which image output and audio output are performed at the time of a specific effect. It is a figure which shows the state during a fluctuation production. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the 1st jackpot is won in the effect mode A, and the effect mode B is selected. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the 1st jackpot is won in the effect mode A, and the effect mode C is selected. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the 1st jackpot is won in the effect mode A, and the effect mode D is selected. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the 1st jackpot is won in the effect mode A, and the effect mode E is selected. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the 2nd big hit is won in the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the effect example which won the 1st jackpot when all the VS reach associated with the effect mode B are memorized. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd Embodiment of the effect mode setting process in the effect control board. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the second embodiment of the ending effect pattern determination table in each effect mode, and (g) is the second implementation of the ending effect pattern determination table when all VS reach is stored. It is a figure which shows the form.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “the present embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the game machine Y, a game board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame Y1, and a game area 2A into which the game ball flows down are formed. It has a game board 2 and a game board 2.

The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island equipment of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism portion H on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum, the front portion of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visually covers the game area 2A with the game board 2 closed.

Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

The glass door Y2 is provided with a saucer 50 for storing a plurality of game balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of operating for launching the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launcher (not shown) capable of launching the game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launching device is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game ball stored in the saucer 50 is supplied to the game ball launcher.

The firing operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2 and a firing handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launching device launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball launching strength”).

In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, a curved inner rail member 29B, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are arranged directly under the large winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path formed on the upper surface thereof is provided at the second starting port 7.

The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. An image display device 13 made of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A, a first effect accessory device 1601, a second effect accessory device 1602, and a third effect accessory device 1603 are provided.

The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. The game ball launched with a predetermined game ball firing intensity climbs between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails or windmills.

The game area 2A is provided with a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. ..

Further, on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A, a first winning gate 9 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Further, a second winning gate 10 through which the game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9 and 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect the game ball. The ordinary symbol lottery will be described later.

At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 13, a first starting port 6 that is immutable and is always capable of entering a ball is provided. The first starting port 6 is provided with a first starting port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. The first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects the game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. Further, when the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A variable second starting port 7 is provided directly below the first starting port 6. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 in either a basic mode (closed mode) in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode (open mode) in which a prize can be won. The second starting port 7 is also provided with a second starting port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. The second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects the game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

The normally movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that a predetermined condition is satisfied), the movable piece 70A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes the basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A rotates forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special aspect of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normally movable piece 70A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

The predetermined condition for the second start port control device 70 is that it is determined to be a winning normal symbol in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery.

A variable large winning opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the second winning gate 10. The big winning opening 8 is controlled by the big winning opening control device 80 in either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The large winning opening 8 is provided with a large winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the large prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The special winning opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that certain conditions are satisfied), the special movable piece 80A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the large winning opening 8 is closed. is doing. The closing of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic aspect of the large winning opening 8.

On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A rotates forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the large winning opening 8. The large winning opening 8 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can be entered. The opening of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special aspect of the large winning opening 8. When the special winning opening 8 is opened, the special movable piece 80A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the large winning opening 8.

The predetermined condition for the large winning opening control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery". ”), It is determined to be a big hit special symbol or a small hit special symbol.

On the surface of the game board 2 below the game area 2A, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, and a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold display device. 23, a hold display device including a second special symbol hold display device 24 and a normal symbol hold display device 25, a round number display device 26, and a right-handed display device 27 are provided.

The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball enters the first start opening 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is It is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

In the first special symbol lottery, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to "big hit". It means to judge whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to "big hit". It means to judge whether or not.

When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 20 performs variable display of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and the first special symbol representing the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed. A stop display is displayed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol display device 21.

For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the special symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is turned on.

The ordinary symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the ordinary symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10. In the ordinary symbol lottery, when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, a random value for hit determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired random value for collision determination is a random value corresponding to "hit". It refers to the processing to be performed.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol display device 22 performs variable display of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and stops the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 22 is a notification of the lottery result.

For example, the ordinary symbol display device 22 is each equipped with a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is turned on.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7 during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the large winning opening control device 80 is activated, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and special. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit value is set for the number of pieces that can hold the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. That is, up to four rights to execute the variable display of the special symbol can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

The first special symbol hold display device 23 displays the number of holds (U1: hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol hold number") of the change display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol change display"). do. The second special symbol hold display device 24 displays the number of holds (U2: hereinafter, referred to as "second special symbol hold number") of the change display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol change display"). do. The first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs, and a predetermined LED is turned on according to the number of holds.

Similarly, the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols is set to 4 for the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "various display of ordinary figures"), and the number of reserved figures (G: hereinafter referred to as "number of reserved figures"). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. The normal symbol hold display device 25 is provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of normal symbol hold.

The round number display device 26 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, only the 6th LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, the 4th LED from the left is lit.

The right-handed display device 27 is composed of one LED, and launches a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 2A during a big hit state (special game state) and a time-saving game state (so-called right-handed state). This is for displaying a prompt (right-handed display), and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.
The right-handed display device 27 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game, regardless of the type of jackpot. When the time-saving game state of transitioning after the end is completed, the LED is turned off. In addition, if a big hit is won during the short game state at that time, the LED will continue to light. If the game does not shift to the time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. That is, once the LED of the right-handed display device 27 starts lighting, the LED continues to light until the game state (special game state, time-saving game state) in which the right-handed display device 27 should be turned on ends.

Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect devices are an image display device 13, an audio output device 14, an effect lighting device 15, a first effect accessory device 1601, a second effect accessory device 1602, and a third effect. It is composed of an accessory device 1603. The image display device 13, the first effect accessory device 1601, the second effect accessory device 1602, and the third effect accessory device 1603 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 14 and the effect lighting device are provided. 15 is provided on the glass door Y2.

The image display device 13 produces an image effect by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 13, but other display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

The first production accessory device 1601 includes a first decorative member 16A as a movable member. Further, the second effecting accessory device 1602 includes a second decorative member 16B as a movable member. Further, the third effect accessory device 1603 includes a third decorative member 16C as a movable member. Each effecting accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation. The audio output device 14 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like to produce an audio effect. The effect lighting device 15 performs an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and the emission color of the light of each lamp.

As will be described later, the first decorative member 16A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effecting accessory device 1601 by driving control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the first decorative member 16A is from the "standby position 1" (original position) above the image display device 13 to the "operating position 1-1" (operation position 1-1) which is the central position on the front surface of the image display device 13. Move to the position after moving). Further, the first decorative member 16A moves from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13 via the "operating position 1-1". do. The first decorative member 16A either performs a moving operation such as moving from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" and then returning to the "standby position 1", or moves from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1". After moving to the "operating position 1-2" via "-1", the movement operation such as returning to the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1" is performed.

Similarly, the second decorative member 16B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1602 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the second decorative member 16B is tilted to the left from the "standby position 2" (original position), which is the position on the right side of the image display device 13, with the lower part of the second decorative member 16B as a fulcrum, and the image display device It moves to "operation position 2" (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of 13. When the second decorative member 16B moves from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", it then stands up to the right with the lower part of the second decorative member 16B as a fulcrum and moves to the "standby position 2" (original position). Performs a moving operation such as returning.

Similarly, the third decorative member 16C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1603 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the third decorative member 16C tilts to the right from the "standby position 3" (original position), which is the lower left position of the image display device 13, with the lower part of the third decorative member 16C as a fulcrum, and displays an image. It moves to the "operating position 3" (position after movement), which is the position on the front surface of the device 13. When the third decorative member 16C moves from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3", it then stands up on the left side with the lower part of the third decorative member 16C as a fulcrum and moves to the "standby position 3" (original position). Operations such as returning are possible.
The first decorative member 16A, the second decorative member 16B, and the third decorative member 16C are not limited to the shapes and operating modes described here.

Further, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 17 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described later.

The effect button device 17 detects that the operable effect button 17A, the effect button operation detection switch 17a11 for detecting the pressing operation on the effect button 17A, and the effect button 17A are held at the maximum special operation position described later. A protrusion state detection switch 17a21 is provided (see FIG. 3).

The effect button 17A has a non-protruding state (FIG. 2 (a)) in which the effect button 17A is a normal operation position and a projecting state (FIG. 2 (b)) in which the effect button 17A protrudes to an operation position above the non-projection state. , The state when the pressing operation is detected can be changed to a state in which the state is retracted downward from the non-protruding state (FIG. 2 (c)).
In the non-protruding state, the effect button 17A is in a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
Further, in the protruding state, the effect button 17A is in a state of protruding upward several times (about 7 to 10 times) from the surface around the saucer 50 as compared with the non-protruding state.
Further, the effect button 17A slightly retracts downward from the surface around the saucer 50, and is in a pressed state in which the pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 17 has a structure in which the effect button 17A can be changed into a non-protruding state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the effect button 17A in the non-protruding state or the protruding state is pressed and enters the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and then when the pressing operation is released, the pressed state returns to the non-projecting state.

The direction in which the effect button 17A moves between the non-protruding position, the projecting position, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressing position) is defined as the advancing / retreating direction of the effect button 17A.

When the effect button 17A is in a state where the push operation is detected, the effect button operation detection switch 17a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the complete press operation of the effect button 17A has been detected to the lamp control board 104. do.

Further, when the effect button 17A is in the projecting state, the projecting state detection switch 17a21 outputs a projecting state detection signal indicating that the effect button 17A is held at the position where the effect button 17A is maximally projecting (protruding state position). Output to.

Further, the effect button 17A has a transparent member capable of transmitting light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 17A to the outside, and the effect button 17A is illuminated.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 114, the effect button 17A can vibrate (reciprocate) in the vertical direction (advance / reciprocating direction) from the non-protruding state, and the vibration speed is low speed vibration and high speed vibration. There are two stages. It is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 17A is vibrating, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 17A. When the player touches the effect button 17A while the effect button 17A is vibrating at a low speed, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "poco ... poco ...", and the player is vibrating at a high speed when the effect button 17A is vibrating at high speed. When he touches the effect button 17A, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "pocopocopocopoco".

The selection button device 18 is provided on the left side of the effect button device 17, and is connected to the operable selection button 18A and the selection button 18A to detect the pressing operation on the selection button 18A. (See FIG. 3).

The selection button 18A has an upper portion 181A, a left portion 182A, a lower portion 183A, a right portion 184A, and a central portion 185A. The entire upper surface of the selection button 18A including the upper portion 181A, the left portion 182A, the lower portion 183A, the right portion 184A, and the central portion 185A is provided so as to be pressable in a state of slightly protruding from the saucer 50.

Further, the selection button 18A has a transparent member capable of transmitting light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the selection button 18A to the outside, and the selection button 18A is illuminated.

The light emitting mode of the selection button 18A changes depending on the operation validity period in which the operation for the selection button 18A is valid and the other period.
For example, the lighting state of the selection button 18A changes between the operation valid period and the other period. For example, the selection button 18A is a "lighting state" that lights up in any color during the operation valid period, and is a "non-lighting state" that does not light up during other periods. Further, for example, the selection button 18A is "a state of lighting in a specific color (for example, red)" during the operation valid period, and "lights in a color different from the operation valid period (for example, blue)" in other periods. "State".

When the selection button 18A is pressed, the selection button operation detection switch 18a outputs a selection button operation detection signal indicating that the selection button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104. When the selection button operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102.

The selection button operation detection switch 18a includes an upper operation detection switch that detects a pressing operation of the upper 181A, a left operation detecting switch that detects a pressing operation of the left portion 182A, and a lower operation detecting switch that detects a pressing operation of the lower 183A. The right portion operation detection switch for detecting the pressing operation of the right portion 184A and the central portion operation detecting switch for detecting the pressing operation of the central portion 185A (not shown).

When the detection switches of the upper part 181A, the left part 182A, the lower part 183A, the right part 184A, and the central part 185A in the selection button operation detection switch 18a detect the pressing operation, the upper operation detection signal, the left part operation detection signal, and the lower operation, respectively. The detection signal, the right part operation detection signal, and the central part operation detection signal are output to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. The upper operation detection signal, the left operation detection signal, the lower operation detection signal, and the right operation detection signal are collectively referred to as a "selection button operation detection signal".

Further, at the left end of the glass door Y2, an effect lever device 19 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described later is provided.

The effect lever device 19 includes an operable effect lever 19A and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a for detecting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operation rod that can be grasped by the player, and is attached so as to be tiltable in the vertical direction. The effect lever operation detection switch 19a detects a downward tilt operation of the effect lever 19A. ..

In the present embodiment, the state in which the operation on the effect button 17A, the selection button 18A, or the effect lever 19A is valid is referred to as an "operation valid state". The sub CPU 102a controls to execute a predetermined effect by operating the operating means for which the operation is valid in the "operation valid state".

As the "operation valid state", in addition to the "operation valid period" consisting of a predetermined predetermined period, there is an example in which the "operation valid state" is established when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
As an example of this predetermined condition, as will be described later, the designated operation execution flag is turned on by pressing the effect button 17A once while the sub CPU 102a is in a standby state in which the game effect is not being executed. It can be set to. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid state in which the operation for the selection button 18A is valid based on the designated operation execution flag being set to on.

The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As the production, for example, there is a special symbol lottery production that is performed with the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery as an opportunity. The special drawing lottery effect is performed by the image display device 13. In the special drawing lottery effect, the variable display of the special effect symbol and the stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

The variable display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special effect symbol, and the special effect symbol fluctuates in a predetermined mode for a predetermined time. The stop display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the stop display of the special effect (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the special effect symbol are collectively referred to, it is referred to as "special effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the special effect symbol, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode indicating the result of the special effect lottery.

The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special effect symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, "1" to "9") arranged in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display area 130 of the image display device 13 or the like. It consists of a decorative pattern that represents a number). In the variable display of the special effect symbol, the special effect symbol in each row moves from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reels are rotating. The mode of variable display of the special effect symbol is not limited to this. Further, during the variable display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the stop display of the special effect symbol, the above three rows of special effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display area 130 such as the image display device 13. The arrangement of the special effect symbols on a predetermined valid line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 130) when the stop display of the special effect symbol is performed represents the result of the special effect symbol lottery.

In addition to the special symbol lottery effect, the roulette effect performed by the ordinary symbol lottery described later, the special game effect performed when the jackpot game is executed, and the variable display or special game of the special symbol are performed for a predetermined period. Various productions such as demonstration productions performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

(Internal configuration of control means)
Next, using FIG. 3, a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, and an image control board 105 provided on the back side of the game board 2 and the game board mounting frame Y1. , The power supply board 107, and the game information output terminal board 108 will be described.

The power supply board 107 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, The power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 101a is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 101a is in an operation stopped state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

On the input side of the main control board 101, a first start port detection sensor 6a, a second start port detection sensor 7a, a large winning opening detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are performed via an input port (not shown). A sensor 9a, a second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and a general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating a normally movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a large winning opening control are provided via an output port (not shown). A large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B and the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, and a first special symbol hold are provided via an output port (not shown). A display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, a normal symbol hold display device 25, a round number display device 26, and a right-handed display device 27 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling each display device to each display device 20 to 27.

Further, a game information output terminal plate 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information about a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the game machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the above-mentioned predetermined game information (external signal).

The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102 so as to be communicable. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

An effect button operation detection switch 17a11, a protrusion state detection switch 17a21, a selection button operation detection switch 18a, and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

The effect button operation detection switch 17a11 outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 17A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104 when the effect button 17A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position. do. The lamp control board 104 outputs the effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 17a to the effect control board 102.

When the effect button 17A is located in the protruding state, the protrusion state detection switch 17a21 outputs a protrusion state detection signal to the lamp control board 104. The lamp control board 104 outputs a protrusion state detection signal input from the protrusion state detection switch 17a21 to the effect control board 102.

When the selection button 18A is pressed, the selection button operation detection switch 18a outputs a selection button operation detection signal indicating that the selection button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104. When the selection button operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102.

When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs an effect lever operation detection signal indicating that the effect lever 19A is tilted to the lamp control board 104. When the effect lever operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102.

The sub CPU 102a includes a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button operation detection signal output from the effect button device 17, a protrusion state detection signal, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 18, and an effect lever device 19. Based on the effect lever operation detection signal output from, the input signal from the timer (crystal oscillator), etc., the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out and arithmetic processing is performed, and the lamp control is performed based on this arithmetic processing. A command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be communicable.

A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32, and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect the rotation angle.

Further, the payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. When the payout control board 103 receives the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated and the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 changes, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 energizes and controls the firing solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing device 4. Since one game ball is fired for each reciprocation of the firing solenoid 41, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

Further, a payout drive unit 51 of a payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area at the time of arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 103a.

The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to each of the above boards. An effect lighting device 15 and an effect accessory device 16 are connected to the output side of the lamp control board 104.

The lamp CPU 104a controls the light emission of the effect lighting device 15 and irradiates the light of the effect lighting device 15 based on the command related to the effect control (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”) transmitted from the effect control board 102. Drive control is performed for the motor to change the direction. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control for the solenoid and the motor for operating the effect accessory device 16 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a causes the LED 1721d of the effect button device 17 to emit light for driving control of the electric motor 17b that moves the effect button 17A of the effect button device 17 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command. Controls light emission.

An effect button operation detection switch 17a11, a protrusion state detection switch 17a21, a selection button operation detection switch 18a, and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

The lamp control board 104 includes an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 17a11, a protrusion state detection signal from the protrusion state detection switch 17a21, a selection button detection signal from the selection button operation detection switch 18a, and an effect lever operation detection switch. When the effect lever operation detection signal from 19a is input, the input detection signal is output to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 has an effect button operation detection signal, a protrusion state detection signal, a selection button detection signal, and an effect lever between the effect control board 102 and the effect button device 17, the selection button device 18, and the effect lever device 19. Relay the operation detection signal.

The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 13, and outputs the image generation unit 105B to the image display device 13 and an audio output to the audio output device 14. It has a voice generation unit 105C that generates the voice signal according to the above and outputs it to the voice output device 14, and a control unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the voice generation unit 105C in an integrated manner.

The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac for controlling the image display by the image display device 13.

The control CPU 105Aa is connected to a control ROM 105Ab in which a control program or the like is stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the control CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving the command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the control CPU 105Aa issues an instruction of the image to be displayed on the image display device 13 to the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also gives the sound generation unit 105C an instruction of the image to be displayed on the image display device 13. An instruction of the voice to be output from the voice output device 14 is given.

The control RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the control CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores the data read from the control ROM 105Ab.

Further, the control ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, and is a program for controlling the control process of the control ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , Various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 13 is included.

The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba which is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

The VDP105Ba is connected to the CGROM105Bb in which the image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on the instruction from the control CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 13, for example, an individual image such as a landscape, a character, and a background image such as a dialogue that constitutes a decorative pattern image or a background of the decorative pattern. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 105Bb is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image.

Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 105Bb may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP105Ba. The VDP105Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 13, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 13.

Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 13.

4 (a) and 4 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 4A is a table (big hit determination table for the first special symbol) referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (big hit determination table for the second special symbol) referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

Each jackpot decision table is a jackpot decision table that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter referred to as "low probability jackpot decision table"). It is composed of a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "high probability jackpot determination table") referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by collating the random numbers for jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, "big hit" and "small hit" are performed. Either "hit" or "miss" is determined.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the jackpot game accompanied by the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result is displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is "small hit", the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result. If the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game is executed.

In addition, in the variable effect as the special figure lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit. As a reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned special effect symbol is pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display area 130 of the image display device 13 during the variable display of the effect symbol ( A part of the effect symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and if the predetermined special effect symbol stops on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, the special effect symbol representing the winning of the jackpot is arranged (so-called). There is a reach effect that causes a "reach state"). If the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the result of the jackpot determination is still "missing" even in this dramatic specific state of reach.

After a reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called "super reach production") that raises the expectation of winning a big hit may or may not be performed in a developmental manner. In addition, the reach state does not always occur in the reach production. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit without the reach state occurring. If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

5 (a) to 5 (c) are diagrams showing an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (stop display mode of the special symbol) is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination. Is.

The special symbol determination table is roughly classified according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is a case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5 (c), is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “missing”.

Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of starting port (first starting port 6 or second starting port 7) at which the game ball that triggers the special symbol determination is inserted.

In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the random number for special symbol determination acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special design is decided. As the identification information of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the special symbol stop symbol data and the special effect symbol designation command are set.

The special symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the special effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102. The special effect symbol designation command is generated at the start of the variation display of the special effect (during the special symbol storage determination process in step S310) and transmitted to the effect control board 102.

The special effect symbol designation command is a 1-byte MODE for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It is composed of data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Regarding the special effect symbol designation command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it means that the first special symbol display device 20 performs stop display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E4H", the second Indicates that the special symbol display device 21 is used to display the stop of the special symbol. The special effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E3H" is the "first special effect symbol designation command", and the special effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E4H" is the "second special effect symbol designation command". ".

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the big hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the big hit game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending. An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

6 (b) to 6 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a big prize opening open / close control table for a big hit game used when controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8. FIG. 6 (b) is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, FIG. 6 (d). ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

The jackpot opening / closing control table for the jackpot game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 8 during the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), which is the number of the round game, and the special electric power, which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the large winning opening 8 are set.

FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a small hit game control table used when controlling a small hit game.

The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As a condition for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the small hit game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command to be performed, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are associated with the type of small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening 8. The large winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening 8 during the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), the special electric operation number (K) which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80), and the large winning opening The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the mouth 8 are set.

FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a game condition data determination table to be referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information representing the game conditions newly set (variable) after the big hit game when the big hit is won. The game condition data is associated with the winning probability of the jackpot at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the winning probability of the jackpot (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game. Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

The game condition data is composed of 2 bytes of data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents the winning probability of the jackpot newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", the winning probability of the big hit is set to a high probability (high probability game state) after the big hit game, and if it is "00H", the winning probability of the big hit after the big hit game is low probability (low probability game). State) is set. On the other hand, the lower byte of the game condition data represents the ease of winning the start opening newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", the ease of winning the starting mouth after the big hit game is set to easy (time saving game state), and if it is "00H", the ease of winning the starting mouth after the big hit game is difficult (non-time saving game state). ) Is set.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot and the ease of winning the starting point are set as the game conditions.

The game condition determination table includes game condition data, ON / OFF of each game condition, that is, a flag (high probability flag and time saving flag) indicating the game condition, and the number of times of variable display of a special symbol that can be executed by the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as "executable number of times") is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of variable display of the special symbol according to the newly set game conditions. The number of times this special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of times the jackpot determination is determined.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, when the jackpot game is executed, the main CPU 101a is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot game is completed. Set a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state).
In this specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 101a terminates the specific gaming state when the number of determinations of the jackpot determination (the number of times the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. There is. In this way, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called "ST machine".

(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
9 to 12 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining an mode of variation display of a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure variation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a special map variation pattern determination table referred to when determining a special map variation pattern in a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the first to thirty times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
FIG. 11 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the 31st to the 74th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
FIG. 12 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining the special variation pattern in the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when the third big hit is won, or the special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when the small hit is won. The description of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table will be omitted.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8 (b)) of the main ROM 101b, and determines the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the time saving flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations in the variation display of the special symbol is confirmed, and the special symbol is specified according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuations. Figure Select the variation pattern determination table.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 31 times, refer to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. do.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state and the number of times the special symbol is changed is 31 to 74 times, refer to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. do.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state and the number of times the special symbol is changed is 75 to 84 times, refer to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. do.

Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, or when a small hit is won, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data and special symbols that reflect the result of special symbol determination and the type of special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display. The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining the presence or absence of reach, and the special figure variation pattern determination value for determining the special figure variation pattern are stored.

In the main CPU 101a, when the special figure stop symbol data is "10H" to "17H", or "20H", "21H" (big hit, small hit), the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern acquired when the ball enters 7 is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data, and the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated. To determine.

Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H" (loss), the main CPU 101a confirms the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) related to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. .. The main CPU 101a acquires a random number for reach determination and collates it with a reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed number of reserved special figures (U1 or U2) to determine whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss without reach". Or, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach".

Although the maximum number of "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special figures, when determining whether the special figure fluctuation pattern is "missing without reach" or "missing with reach". Does not refer to "4" as the number of pending numbers.

When the main CPU 101a determines "loss without reach", the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the "loss without reach". Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

When the main CPU 101a determines "loss with reach", the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the "loss with reach". Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

The main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern by the special symbol variation pattern determination process (step S313-3) at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure fluctuation time"). The special symbol variation patterns are the first special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20, and the second special symbol variation pattern displayed on the second special symbol display device 21. 2 It is distinguished from the second special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the special symbol.

The main CPU 101a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has a jackpot winning expectation (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example,). The expectation (reliability) of winning the first big hit and the second big hit) is associated with it.

As will be described later, the sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the effect content based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101. In the rightmost column of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, for reference, the effect type of the variation effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special figure variation pattern designation command. ing.

Here, as the effect content, "design variation" means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variedly displayed on the image display device 13.

In addition, "reach" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special effect symbols that notify the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effect symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of three-digit special effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot, two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining special effects are temporarily stopped. A mode in which the effect pattern is fluctuating. In addition, "temporary stop" refers to a mode in which the special production symbol fluctuates to the player due to a small shaking or small deformation of the special production symbol.

In the effect type of the variation effect shown in FIG. 9, "design variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" are "missing" as the judgment result of the jackpot determination without becoming the reach mode after the plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed. It is a variable production that informs. "Design variation 1" is a "shortening variation" performed in an extremely short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. "Design variation 2" and "symbol variation 3" are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

Further, in the "normal reach" shown in FIG. 9, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed. It is a variable production that performs reach production.

Further, the "challenge reach 1" shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small hit. In this "Challenge Reach 1", after a symbol change that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7), and the character is displayed. Challenge reach that challenges the treasure hunt game of searching for the target item from multiple treasure chests, and suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or small hit by acquiring the item by the character. Is to do.

Further, in the "challenge reach 2" shown in FIG. 9, a character different from the character appearing in the challenge reach 1 changes the target item from the plurality of treasure chests after the symbol change that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. The challenge reach is to challenge the treasure hunt game of searching, and to suggest that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is the third big hit or the small hit by acquiring the item.

Further, in the "super reach" shown in FIG. 9, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production that performs normal reach, and then performs super reach, which has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach.

Further, in "Special Reach 1" shown in FIG. 9, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation of displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. It is a variable effect that performs a normal reach to be displayed, and then performs a special reach with a higher expectation for a big hit than the above-mentioned super reach.

Further, the "special reach 2" shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed, then a normal reach is performed, then a super reach is performed, and then a special reach is performed.

Further, in the "design variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation time is 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special figure fluctuation times are the "symbol variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time at the time of execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the "special figure fluctuation pattern 30" for executing the shortest "design variation 1" with the special figure variation time of 2 seconds is 4 as shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of the "special symbol variation pattern 00" for executing the "symbol variation 1" in seconds.

In addition, the contents of "Super Reach 1" to "Super Reach 3" shown in FIG. 10 are different from those of the above Super Reach (for example, another character appears) after the symbol changes to display a plurality of special effects symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production to perform. These "super reach 1" to "super reach 3" correspond to the character reach and the music reach in the effect mode B1, the effect mode C1, the effect mode D1, and the effect mode E1, which will be described later.

Further, the "special reach" shown in FIG. 10 is a variable effect in which a special reach having a different content from the above special reach (such as the appearance of another character) is performed after a symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed. This "special reach" corresponds to VS reach and story reach in the effect mode B1, the effect mode C1, the effect mode D1, and the effect mode E1, which will be described later.

Further, in the effect type of the variation effect shown in FIG. 11, "design variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" are variation effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed, and are variation effects corresponding to the special symbol variation time. The production time of is different.

Further, "Super Reach 1" and "Super Reach 3" shown in FIG. 11 have different contents (for example, another character appears) from the above-mentioned Super Reach after the symbol change for displaying a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production to perform. The "super reach 1" and "super reach 3" correspond to the character reach in the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, and the effect mode E2, which will be described later.

Further, the "special reach" shown in FIG. 11 is a variable effect in which a special reach having a different content from the above special reach (such as the appearance of another character) is performed after a symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed. This "special reach" corresponds to VS reach and story reach in the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, and the effect mode E2, which will be described later.

Further, the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special map variation pattern for executing an extremely short variation effect such as a special map variation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, in "rock-paper-scissors effect 1" to "rock-paper-scissors effect 4", two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same after the symbol variation of displaying a plurality of special effect symbols. It is a variable effect that generates a reach state in which a numerical value (for example, 7) is stopped and displayed, and performs a "rock-paper-scissors effect" in which two characters (a friend's character and an opponent's character) perform rock-paper-scissors.

If the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed in which the ally character loses to the rock-paper-scissors. Further, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed in which the ally character wins the rock-paper-scissors game. In addition, when the determination result of the big hit determination is "third big hit" or "small hit", a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed.

In addition, a start opening winning designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special map variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special map variation pattern determined by the special map variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special map variation pattern determination.

The special symbol variation pattern designation command is a 1-byte unit for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 20 or second special symbol display device 21) on which variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of the MODE data of the above and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the special symbol variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the first special symbol display device 20 performs variation display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E7H", the first is 2 It is shown that the special symbol display device 21 performs variable display of the special symbol.

The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E6H" is called "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command", and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E7H" is called "second". Special figure fluctuation pattern specification command ".

The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it means that the game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", it means to the second start port 7. Indicates that a game ball has entered. In addition, the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "first start opening prize designation command", and the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is the "second start opening prize designation command". ".

13 (a) to 13 (f) show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning a prize at the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game accompanied by opening the second starting port 7. As will be described later, the hit determination is performed based on the hit determination random number acquired based on the passage of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the game ball.

The winning decision table is divided according to the ease of winning the starting point. Specifically, the winning determination table is divided into a winning determination table referred to in the non-time saving gaming state and a winning determination table referred to in the time saving gaming state.

In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired random numbers for hit determination with the hit determination table, either "hit" or "loss" is determined. If the "hit" is won, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening the second starting port 7 is executed.

FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The ordinary symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and miss).

In each normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol determination value and the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by collating the random number for normal symbol determination acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the identification information of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

FIG. 13 (c) determines a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal map fluctuation pattern”) associated with a time required for displaying the fluctuation of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal map fluctuation time”). It is a figure which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the non-time saving gaming state and a normal map variation pattern determination table referred to in the time saving gaming state.

In each table, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more normal map fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern, which is acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, with the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table. To.

The command for specifying the normal map fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination. When the effect control board 102 receives the normal symbol variation pattern designation command, the variation display of the normal symbol is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol can be recognized. can.

The normal map fluctuation pattern specification command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the game state related to the current start opening winning ease and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the normal map fluctuation pattern. There is. Regarding the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "D6H", it means that it is in the non-time saving game state, and if the MODE data is "D7H", it means that it is in the time saving game state.

FIG. 13D is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game reference data determination table. Data (auxiliary game reference data) referred to when performing an auxiliary game is stored in this table. As shown in FIG. 13D, the auxiliary game reference data determination table is associated with the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal figure stop symbol data, and the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning ease state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

FIG. 13 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling an auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

FIG. 13 (f) is a diagram showing an example of a second start port open / close control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. The condition for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting port 7 during the auxiliary game is stored in the second starting port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, the normal electric operation number (D), which is the opening number of the second starting port 7 (operation of the second starting port control device 70) in the auxiliary game, and the second 2 The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the starting port 7 are set.

(Explanation of types of special games)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is the "big hit game" and the "small hit" that are executed when the "big hit" is won. It is composed of a "small hit game" that is executed when the player wins the game. The jackpot game is mainly divided into a "first jackpot game", a "second jackpot game", and a "third jackpot game" depending on the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

In the jackpot game, a round game involving opening of the jackpot 8 at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the large winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total of the times that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are preset. The reason why it is "possible to open" is that the number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the large winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Further, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. The maximum number of times the big winning opening 8 is opened and the maximum opening time in each round game may or may not be unified in each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, the game conditions that are the conditions for the progress of the game will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starter winning ease are set as game conditions. Regarding the winning probability of the jackpot, the game progresses under the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and regarding the ease of winning the starting opening of the game ball, the game progresses under the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming condition is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and is referred to as a normal gaming state based on this low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, it is set to 1/80, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of times the jackpot can be won per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is in a state of being.

The non-time-saving game state is a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the starting opening is normal. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is set to 15 seconds, and it operates when the "hit" is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operating time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for a normal symbol is 1 /. It means that it is set to 50. In addition, the "total opening time" means that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times for each hit, and a game ball can be won for each hit. This is because the number of balls is limited, and when the number of game balls wins, the game balls close without waiting for the opening time to elapse.

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 (operating time of the second starting port control device 70) per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the second starting port 7 is used. Refers to a gaming state in which is likely to be in an open mode. Due to the relatively high ease of winning the starting opening, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the larger the number of jackpot winnings per unit time, so the time-saving game state is non-time-saving. It can be said that the state is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, which is a hit. The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the starting opening winning ease are set in favor of the player over the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the second starting port 7 is opened twice through the closing (interval) for 1.0 second, but there is no such closing and it may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player launches the game ball by operating an appropriate firing handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 as compared with the non-time-saving game state, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

In this way, depending on the winning of the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (1st to 3rd jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low-probability game state or high-probability game state, and non-time-saving game state) Or a combination with a time-saving game state) is determined. In view of this, the actual types of jackpots (types of jackpots based on the profitability enjoyed by the player) are the types of jackpot games to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game is completed ( It can be said that it is a combination with the game state). Therefore, in the following, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, the combination of the type of jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, the type of profit enjoyed by the player is used. It is possible to classify the types of jackpots.

By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game (first jackpot game) with 16R (round) rounds is executed, and then the jackpot is set to the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which is called the "first jackpot". By winning, a jackpot game with 4R (round) rounds (“second jackpot game”) is executed, and then the jackpot that is set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is called a “second jackpot”. By winning, a jackpot game with a number of rounds of 2R (round) (“third jackpot game”) is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is referred to as a “third jackpot”.

If the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the game is in a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, even if a small hit is won, the game conditions do not change. That is, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing by the main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the boot program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to the power being turned on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command to the effect that this initialization process has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. ..

In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number composed of the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. After that, the processing of step S20 and step S30 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing by the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the following timer interruption processing is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

In step S110, the main CPU 101a is a special game timer counter that performs a special symbol variation time update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, a special winning opening 8 opening / closing time update process, and the like. Further, a time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter that performs the update process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of the normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the second start port 7, and the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a hit determination random number.

In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the hit determination initial value random number.

Regarding the update of various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1", and each random number value is newly added from the initial value random number at that time. Update to.

In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a newly valid signal is transmitted from the predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20.

In step S300, the main CPU 101a includes a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, a first special symbol hold display device 23, a second special symbol hold display device 24, and a large winning opening control device 80. The special symbol special electric control process (special symbol system process) for controlling (control of the special symbol system device) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30.

In step S400, the main CPU 101a performs a normal symbol control process (normal) for controlling the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second start port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Design processing) is performed.

In this Fuzu Fuden control processing (ordinary symbol system processing), the main CPU 101a loads the value of the Fuzu Fuden processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded Fuzu Fuden processing data, and refers to the Fuzu Fuden processing data. If the electric processing data = 0, the normal symbol of whether or not the auxiliary game is executed (the second starting port 7 is opened) based on the normal map determination information acquired based on the winning of the winning gates 9 and 10. If the normal symbol storage determination process including the determination is performed and the normal symbol processing data = 1, the normal symbol variation process when the normal symbol display device 22 is fluctuating is performed based on the normal symbol determination. If the figure normal power processing data = 2, the normal symbol stop processing is performed when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and if the normal symbol processing data = 3, the second start port 7 is controlled to open / close (open / close control). Auxiliary game processing (operation of the second start port control device 70) is performed.

In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, in the main CPU 101a, whether or not the prize ball counter corresponding to the starting port (first starting port 6, second starting port 7), the large winning opening 8 and the general winning opening 11 exceeds "0". If the number exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

In step S600, the main CPU 101a has external signal output control data for outputting information about the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data for driving the 80B (starting port opening / closing solenoid drive data and winning opening opening / closing solenoid drive data), and predetermined symbols on the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25. Data creation processing of display control data (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data) for display is performed.

In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to light each of the LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. .. Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

(Input control processing by the main control board)
The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S220. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening winning ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it.

In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 8. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process shifts to step S230. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and also wins the large winning opening 8. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a are input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First start port detection signal input processing by the main control board)
Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated, and if there is a valid detection signal, the start opening prize ball counter is updated by adding "1" in step S232, and the first start opening winning flag of the main RAM 101c is added. Turn on the first start opening winning flag in the storage area.

In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold is performed in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is added by "1" and updated. Further, in step S234, in order to update the first special symbol hold display number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold display device 23, the main CPU 101a displays the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set in the specified area of.

In step S235, the main CPU 101a first specializes the special determination information consisting of each random number value indicated by the big hit determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter. Stores in the symbol hold storage area.

The first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in the storage unit in which the random numbers are not stored. It is stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

In step S236, the main CPU 101a makes a first pre-determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

Specifically, in the first pre-determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, The first special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure variation pattern as the first prior determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (S313).

Then, in step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the first prior determination in the transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) for production of the main RAM 101c. ..

(Second start port detection signal input processing by the main control board)
Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a shifts to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the start opening prize ball counter to update, adds "1" to the second start opening entry regulation counter, and updates, and also adds "1" to the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. Winning flag Turns on the second starting opening winning flag in the storage area. The second starting port entry regulation counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter for counting the second special symbol hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process is transferred to step S244.

In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a uses the main RAM 101c to display special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in order to update the second special symbol hold display number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold display device 24. Set in the specified area of.

In step S245, the main CPU 101a secondly specializes the special determination information consisting of each random number value indicated by the big hit determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter. Stores in the symbol hold storage area.

The second special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in the storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. It is stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

Then, the main CPU 101a makes a second pre-determination based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second pre-determination will be described.

Specifically, in the second pre-determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, The second special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure variation pattern as the second prior determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313).

Then, in step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the second prior determination in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. ..

(Winning gate detection signal input processing by the main control board)
Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a whether or not there is a valid detection signal. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated, and if it is determined that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a shifts to step S252.

In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the process ends, and if the counter value (G) is determined to be smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the counter value (G) of the normal figure hold number counter and updates it. Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a displays the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold display number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25. set.

In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores each random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and stores the winning gate detection signal input process. To finish.

The normal symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14 (c)), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored. It will be memorized in order from. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14 (d)).

(Special figure special electric control processing by the main control board)
Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. The value of the special figure special electric processing data is loaded in step S301, the branch destination address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination processing (step S310). ), If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is performed in the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the big hit game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the small hit game processing (step S350). If the processing data = 5, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game end processing (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing by the main control board)
Next, the special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 22. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the process ends, and if it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the number of reserved second special figures (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the number of reserved second special figures (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move the process.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a subtracts and updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter by "1", and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is stored. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is erased. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more, the process shifts to step S310-5.

The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol hold number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and shifts the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-6. I do.

For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number value used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

In addition, in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2) in accordance with the data shift process (digestion process of the hold) in step S310-6, specifically. Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol holding storage area, but the game ball is used as the starting port. The first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area may be shifted in the order in which the balls are entered, or the first special symbol holding storage area may be shifted in preference to the second special symbol holding storage area. You may let me.

If it is determined in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to the customer waiting state setting process of steps S319-1 to S319-3. First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S319-1 whether or not the demo determination flag "01H" is set in the demo determination flag storage area. When the demo judgment flag "01H" is set in the demo judgment flag storage area, the special symbol storage judgment process is terminated, and when the demo judgment flag "01H" is not set in the demo judgment flag storage area, the special symbol storage judgment process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S319-2.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag "01H" in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the demo designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

In step S311 the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted and newly stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-6.

(Big hit judgment processing by the main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6.

If it is determined in step S311-1 of the main CPU 101a that it is the first starting port 6, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S311-1 of the main CPU 101a that it is not the first starting port 6 (it is the second starting port 7), the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol is selected in step S311-3.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is in a high-probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, further "from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3". Select the "first high-probability jackpot determination table" or the "second high-probability jackpot determination table".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, further "first low probability" from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Select "Big hit decision table" or "Second low probability jackpot decision table".

In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6, and selects the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. It is collated with the "decision table" or the "low-probability jackpot determination table" to determine whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss", and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

When the jackpot determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

(Special symbol judgment processing by the main control board)
Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a big hit in step S312-3, and if it is not determined to be a "big hit", step S312- Move the process to 2.

In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a "small hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "small hit", the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4, and if it is not determined to be a "small hit", the process shifts to step S312-5.

In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. By collating the random value for special symbol determination in the 0th storage unit shifted in S310-6 with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5A), the jackpot special symbol can be obtained. Make a special symbol judgment to be decided.

In step 312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit is determined by collating the random value for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning the small hit (FIG. 5 (b)). Make a judgment.

In step 312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The loss special symbol is determined by collating the random value for special symbol determination in the 0th storage unit shifted in S310-6 with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5 (b)). Make a special symbol judgment.

Then, in step S312-6, the special effect symbol designation command is determined based on the results of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designation command is produced. Set in the transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a has stopped symbol data related to the special symbol based on the results of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5 (hereinafter, "special symbol stop"). (Referred to as "symbol data"), that is, the type of special symbol is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

The determined special symbol stop symbol data is used as a "big hit special symbol" or "small hit" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 27 when the special symbol variation pattern is determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. 25, as will be described later. It is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 28 or the small hit game process of FIG. 29 when determining "special symbol" or the like.

In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a collates the special symbol stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the state of the current jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by collating the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and stored in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, the time required to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol fluctuation time) based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol variation time) and A special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the production type of the fluctuation effect described later is determined.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing by the main control board)
Next, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON or OFF of the high probability flag and the ON or OFF of the time saving flag in the game condition determination table of FIG. 8B, and refers to the current game state (high probability). Check the gaming state or low-probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state or non-time-saving gaming state).

In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S313-3, except for the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. If it is in the gaming state, the process is transferred to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of fluctuations of the variation display of the special symbol to be started from now on (1 to 30 times, 31 to 74 times, 75 times to 84 times). Check the times).

In step S313-4, when the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of the variation display of the special symbol confirmed in step S313-3.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H", that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing", the main CPU 101a further determines the special symbol variation pattern. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires a random number for reach determination, collates it with a random number value for reach determination (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed number of reserved special figures (U1 or U2), and collates it with a special figure of "loss without reach". It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach".

In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a random number for determining a special figure variation pattern, and obtains the acquired random number for determining a special figure variation pattern and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special figure variation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, the process returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted for production of the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the special symbol starts by receiving this command, and finally the special figure variation pattern designation. Determine the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect based on the command.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the game condition at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and sets the game state designation command reflecting the state in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 101c. ..

Then, in step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure fluctuation time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol variation display data in order to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

The main CPU 101a sets the flag "00H" in the demo determination flag storage area in step S310-11, that is, clears the demo determination flag storage area, and sets the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

(Special symbol variation processing by the main control board)
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter =). Is it 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not completed, the special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol ends, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol ends. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a stops and displays the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21, based on the special symbol stop symbol data set in step S312-13. To set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop time”, for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electric processing data.

In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first start opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

(Special symbol stop processing by the main control board)
Next, the special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the special symbol stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not completed, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop process, and if it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is completed, the step S330-2 is performed. Move the process.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area means that the time saving gaming state is currently in effect. If the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-3, and if the flag is turned off in the time saving flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a is set to "1" from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol due to the time-saving game state (J: hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times in the time-saving game state"). The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the remaining number of times of the time-saving game state (J).

In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J) = 0. If the number of remaining time-saving game states (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-5, and if the number of remaining time-reduced game states (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state becomes "0" means that the variation display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Ja) that the variation display of the special symbol can be executed in the time-saving game state, and the variation display of the special symbol depending on the "time reduction" state. Means that is finished.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in a high-probability gaming state. When the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-7, and when the flag is turned off in the high probability flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-10.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of a high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “high-probability gaming state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from is stored as a new high-probability gaming state remaining number of times (X).

In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-9, and if the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-10.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (X) in the high-probability gaming state becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Xa) that the variation of the special symbol can be executed in the high-probability gaming state, and the special symbol in the "high probability" state is performed. It means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets the game state designation command indicating the game state in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). do. Here, if it is determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-14, and if it is not determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-12.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is "small hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, if it is determined to be a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-17, and if it is not determined to be a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-13.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), the remaining fluctuation count counter in the high probability gaming state, and the remaining fluctuation count counter in the time saving gaming state. do.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets the opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to step S330-16.

(Big hit game processing by the main control board)
Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. 28.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The opening here means the period from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-3. ..

In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is confirmed which big hit is according to the special figure stop symbol data, the big winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of big hit is selected, and it is set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the long-hit game large winning opening opening / closing control table or the short-hit gaming large winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores it. Since the round game has not been executed even once at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the round game number storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the value (special electric operation number (K)) stored in the special electric operation number storage area and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a sets the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B to open the large winning opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 8 ( The operating time of the large winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. This is to transmit the information that the round game is started to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long hit game, "1" is set in the round game number storage area and "1" is set in the special electric operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating a one-round game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the special electric operation number storage area, the jackpot game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the image display device 13 displays the effect, for example, "Round 1".

In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the end of all the preset round games (the final opening of the big prize opening 8 is finished) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-17, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is determined. Move the process to.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the large winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is being opened, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-8 whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. do. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). ) Is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, in order to close the large winning opening 8, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c, and the large winning opening opening / closing determined in step 340-3 is performed. With reference to the control table, the closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K). As a result, the large winning opening 8 will be closed.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game is completed. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, nine). ) Is reached, so it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. Then, if it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process is transferred to step S340-12, and if it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S340-7 that the large winning opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset closing time has elapsed in step S340-11. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-4.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When the main CPU 101a determines "Yes", the process is transferred to step S340-15, and when the determination is "No", the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores it.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area is reset.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of jackpot is confirmed according to the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S340-18, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

(Small hit game processing by the main control board)
Next, the small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to S350-5.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S350-3.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a large winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the large winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. In the large winning opening opening process, first, "1" is added to the value (special electric operation number (K)) stored in the special electric operation number storage area and stored. Then, in order to open the large winning opening 8 is set, the energization start data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special electric operation is performed with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3. The opening time of the large winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the end of the opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently ending, the process is transferred to step S350-13, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently performed, the process is transferred to step S350-6.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open. If the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is not open, the process shifts to step S350-10, and if it is determined that the large winning opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. , It is determined whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. As this "opening end condition", the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9), or one opening time of the large winning opening 8 has elapsed (special game timer counter). = 0) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. do.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the large winning opening 8 and the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 350-3 is referred to. , The closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current special electric operation number (K). As a result, the large winning opening 8 will be closed.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game end condition is satisfied. The small hit game end condition is that the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times the large winning opening 8 is opened in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is the specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. Then, when it is determined that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11, and when it is determined that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the small hit game process is performed. To finish.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets "0" in the special electric operation number storage area and sets "0" in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game end process. That is, the special electric operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hit in the transmission data storage area for effect based on the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the ending time according to the type of small hit. Is set in the special game timer counter.

In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. The closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, like the opening time. As a result, if it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and if it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-4. ..

In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S350-14 and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the small hit game process is terminated.

In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data.

(Big hit game end processing by the main control board)
Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads the game condition data.

In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high-probability flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S360-4, and if it is determined that the high-probability flag is turned on, the high-probability flag is stored in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-3. (01H) is turned ON, and the number of times (Ja) that can be executed (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high-probability game state remaining number counter.

In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the time reduction flag in the time reduction flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S360-6, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the time saving flag (01H) is set in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time as turning it on, the number of times that can be executed (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the time-saving game state remaining number counter.

In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the state of the current game condition in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S360-7, the special feature is set. 0 is set in the special electric processing data in the figure, and the processing is transferred to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 22.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, the processing executed by the sub CPU 102a on the effect control board 102 will be described.

First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and performs a process of initializing the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of updating an effect random number used to control an effect including a special effect determination random number, a variation effect pattern determination random number, an effect mode determination random number, and the like.

A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the process of updating the random number for production, a random number counter provided for each type of random number is added by "1". A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random numbers. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without being added by "1".

Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set so as to differ depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the random numbers for production from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from completely synchronizing, instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, the various production random numbers are provided with different initial value random numbers. When updating a random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by the effect control board)
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds), so that the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 32 is executed.

In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a into the stack area.

In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The details of this command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 on the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process on the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, a process of analyzing the command received in this step S1300 is performed.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect input control process. The details of this effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by the production control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a receives a new command and determines whether or not the command is stored in the receive buffer. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process, and when it determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a demo designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303, and determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1304.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demo effect standby flag in the demo effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a preprocessing for executing the demo effect, and the time until the demo effect is started (demo effect standby). Time) is set in the demo effect timer counter, and the command analysis process is terminated.

In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the start opening prize designation command, the process is transferred to step S1305 and step S1306, and when it is determined that the command is not the start opening winning designation command, the process is transferred to step S1307. ..

In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening winning designation command storage process. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in the effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the start opening winning designation command storage process.

The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start port (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the starting opening winning designation command, and confirms the type of the starting opening. It is stored in the production information storage area according to the above.

Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of start ports 6 and 7. The start opening prize designation command is stored in order from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the start opening prize designation command is not stored.

In addition, each storage unit stores the production data of the effect performed based on the start port prize designation command unit that stores the start port prize designation command and the start port prize designation command stored in the start port prize designation command unit. It is equipped with a production data storage unit.

In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a performs a look-ahead effect determination process based on the start opening winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the game state designation command, the process is transferred to step S1308, and when it is determined that there is no game status specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1309.

In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the game state indicated by the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special effect symbol designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a special effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310 and step S1311, and determines that there is no special effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a processes the process in step S1312. Move.

In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening winning designation command shift process. In the start opening prize designation command shift process, the sub CPU 102a shifts the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening related to the received special effect symbol designation command.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a confirms the type of the start port related to the received special effect symbol designation command, and shifts the start port winning designation command stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to the start port. In the shift of the start opening prize designation command, the start opening winning designation command stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted (moved) to the previous storage unit. For example, the start opening winning designation command stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information storage area. Further, the start opening winning designation command stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information storage area is the effect information common to the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area (the first effect information storage area). The start opening winning designation command that has been shifted to the 0 storage unit) and stored in the effect information storage area is deleted.

In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect symbol pattern determination process for displaying a stop display of the special effect symbol suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery, and ends the command analysis process. In the special effect symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect symbol designation command and causes the sub CPU 102a to stop and display in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 based on the information contained in the received special effect symbol designation command. The pattern, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the decorative symbols arranged on the predetermined effective line in the stop display of the special effect symbol is determined.

In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a special figure variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313, and determines that there is no special figure variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1314. ..

In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a performs a variation effect pattern determination process for determining a variation effect pattern (including a variation display of the special effect symbol) suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery, and ends the command analysis process. .. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 37.

In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special effect symbol stop designation command, the process shifts to step S1315 and step S1316, and when it is determined that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1317. Move the process.

In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect is terminated by receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, end the variation effect, and display the stop of the special effect symbol. .. The end time of this effect is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset effect event during the variable effect.

Further, in step S1315, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect data stored in the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later.

In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a transition destination effect mode setting process for setting a transition destination effect mode triggered by the end of the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of a variation effect performed by an effect device such as an image display device 13 corresponding to a special symbol lottery (or a variation display of a special symbol). , Associated with the state of the game conditions, etc.

In the present embodiment, the effect modes are the effect mode A, the effect mode B1, the effect mode C1, the effect mode D1, the effect mode E1, the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, the effect mode E2, the effect mode F, and the effect mode F. There are 11 production modes of production mode G.

The effect mode A is a normal effect mode set in response to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. The types of reach that can be executed in the production mode A are "normal reach", "challenge reach", "super reach", and "special reach".

The effect mode B1 is an effect mode that can be set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game. The types of reach that can be executed in the production mode B1 are "character reach", "music reach", and "VS reach".

◇ The effect mode C1 is an effect mode that can be set corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 to 30 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game and the second big hit game, and is the effect mode B1. , The reach confirmation effect for notifying that the reach is performed is more likely to appear (select) than the effect mode D1 and the effect mode E1. Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode C1 are the same "character reach", "music reach", and "VS reach" as in the effect mode B1, but the characters that appear are different from the effect mode B1.

◇ The effect mode D1 is an effect mode that can be set corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 to 30 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game and the second big hit game, and is the effect mode B1. , The special effect (so-called premium effect), which is executed at a lower rate than the other effects, is more likely to appear (select) than the effect mode C1 and the effect mode E1. Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode D1 are the same "character reach", "music reach", and "VS reach" as in the effect mode B1 and the effect mode C1, but the appearing characters are the effect mode B1 and the effect mode C1. Is different.

-The effect mode E1 is an effect mode that can be set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 1 to 30 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game and the second big hit game. Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode E1 are "character reach", "music reach", and "story reach", unlike the effect mode B1, the effect mode C1, and the effect mode D1.
That is, in the effect modes B1, C1 and D1, the reach type has "VS reach", but in the effect mode E1, it does not have "VS reach".

The effect mode B2 is an effect mode set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the effect mode B1. The types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode B2 are "character reach" and "VS reach".

The effect mode C2 is an effect mode set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the effect mode C1, and is set in the same manner as the effect mode C1. The reach confirmation effect for notifying that the reach is performed is more likely to appear (select) than the effect mode B2, the effect mode D2, and the effect mode E2. Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode C2 are the same "character reach" and "VS reach" as in the effect mode B2, but the characters that appear are different from the effect mode B2.

The effect mode D2 is an effect mode set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the effect mode D1, and is the same as the effect mode D1. Compared to the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, and the effect mode E2, a special effect (so-called premium effect) that is executed at a lower rate than other effects is more likely to appear (select). Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode D2 are the same "character reach" and "VS reach" as the effect mode B2 and the effect mode C2, but the characters appearing are different from the effect mode B2 and the effect mode C2. There is.

The effect mode E2 is an effect mode set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the effect mode E1. Further, the types of reach that can be executed in the effect mode E2 are "character reach" and "story reach", unlike the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, and the effect mode D2.
That is, in the effect modes B2, C2, and D2, the effect type has "VS reach", but in the effect mode E2, the effect mode E2 does not have "VS reach".

◇ The effect mode F is set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, or the effect mode E2. This is the production mode. That is, regardless of which effect mode is set, the effect mode F is set when the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game is 75 to 84 times. It will be. Further, in the effect mode F, the rock-paper-scissors effect is executed in any of the variable effects.

The effect mode G is set corresponding to the number of special figure fluctuations of 1 to 84 times in the high-probability game state and non-time-saving game state or low-probability game state and non-time-saving game state after the third big hit game or small hit game. This is the production mode.

In addition, the production mode B1 and the production mode B2 may be collectively referred to as "production mode B", and similarly, the production mode C1 and the production mode C2 are referred to as "production mode C", and the production mode D1 and the production mode D2. May be collectively referred to as "effect mode D", and the effect mode E1 and effect mode E2 may be collectively referred to as "effect mode E".

Further, the effect mode B1, the effect mode C1, the effect mode D1, and the effect mode E1 are "possible to be set", which will be described in detail later, but in the ending effect of the jackpot game, the effect mode after the jackpot game is used. This is because the player can operate the selection button 18A to arbitrarily set from the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, and the effect mode E.

In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command related to the special game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special game opening designation command, the process is transferred to step S1318, and when it is determined that there is no special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1319.

In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern, which is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, it shifts the process to step S1320, and when it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1321.

In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern, which is an aspect of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets the round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1322, and when it determines that the command is not the special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern, which is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

(Pre-reading effect judgment processing by the effect control board)
A look-ahead effect determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S1306-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and thus the transition destination effect mode setting process (FIG. 40) or the effect mode setting process (FIG. 40) described later. Check the current effect mode set in FIG. 45).

In step S1306-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode F or the effect mode G. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode F or the effect mode G is set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1306-3, and determines that the sub CPU 102a is not the effect mode F or the effect mode G, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1306-4.

In step S1306-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is 4 or more (M ≧ 4). When the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining count counter is 4 or more, the process shifts to step S1306-4, and when it is determined that the counter value of the effect mode remaining count counter is not 4 or more, step S1306-. Move the process to 20.

The effect mode remaining number counter is a specific effect mode (effect mode B, effect mode C) in which the effect mode executable number (Ma), which is the number of variable effects that can be executed by the effect mode, is set. , The effect mode D, the effect mode E, the effect mode F, and the effect mode G) indicate the remaining number of variable effects (M: the remaining number of effect modes).

In step S1306-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the final mode. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the final mode determination random number in the final mode determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1306-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode A. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is set, the process is transferred to step S1306-6, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is not set, the process is transferred to step S1306-7.

In step S1306-6, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 1 (FIG. 47) for the effect mode A.

In step S1306-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode B or the effect mode E. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the effect mode B or effect mode E, it shifts the process to step S1306-8, and if it determines that it is not in the effect mode B or effect mode E, it shifts the process to step S1306-9.

In step S1306-8, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 2 (FIG. 48) for the effect modes B and E.

In step S1306-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode C. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is set, the process is transferred to step S1306-10, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is not set, the process is transferred to step S1306-11.

In step S1306-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 3 (FIG. 49) for the effect mode C.

In step S1306-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode D. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is set, the process is transferred to step S1306-12, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is not set, the process is transferred to step S1306-13.

In step S1306-12, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 4 (FIG. 50) for the effect mode D.

In step S1306-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1306-1 is the effect mode F. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode F is set, the process is transferred to step S1306-14, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode F is not set, the process is transferred to step S1306-15.

In step S1306-14, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 5 (FIG. 51) for the effect mode F.

In step S1306-15, the sub CPU 102a selects the final mode determination table 6 (not shown) for the effect mode G.

The final mode determination tables 1 to 6 are stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

In step S1306-16, the sub CPU 102a determines the final mode of the special figure reservation display. Specifically, the final mode determination random number stored in the final mode determination random number storage area in step S1306-4 is stored in the final mode determination random number storage area in step S1306-6, step S1306-8, step S1306-10, step S1306-12, and step S1306. -14 or the final mode determination table selected in step S1306-15 is collated, and the final mode of the hold display is determined according to the random number determination value ratio set in the final mode determination table.

This final aspect is the final aspect from the occurrence of the special figure hold relating to the display of the image (hereinafter referred to as "holding image") representing the special figure hold (right to execute the special symbol display) to the disappearance. It is a display mode of the reserved image displayed in.

In step S1306-17, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the final aspect determined in step S1306-16 is a special aspect. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the final aspect is the special aspect, the process is transferred to step S1306-18, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the final aspect is not the special aspect, the process is transferred to step S1306-20.

In step S1306-18, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the hold transition pattern. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the hold transfer pattern in the random number storage area for determining the hold transfer pattern of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1306-19, the sub CPU 102a collates the random number for determining the hold transfer pattern stored in the random number storage area for determining the hold transfer pattern in step S1306-18 with the hold transfer pattern determination table (FIGS. 52 to 53). Determine the pending transition pattern.
The hold transition pattern determination table is stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 53.

This hold transition pattern is a transition mode (transition pattern) from the display of the special figure hold image to the final mode of the special figure hold image.

In step S1306-20, when the final mode is a special mode, the sub CPU 102a is a hold effect control command for displaying the hold image corresponding to the hold transition pattern determined in step S1306-19 on the image display device 13. Or, when the final mode is not a special mode (step S1306-17: No) and when the counter value of the effect mode remaining count counter is not 4 or more (step S1306-3: No), the reserved image of the normal mode is imaged. A hold effect control command for displaying on the display device 13 is generated, and in step S1306-21, the hold effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The hold effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when the image control board 105 receives the variation effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 13 to display the reserved image indicated by the command.

Further, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 13 to change and display the hold image at the change timing of the hold image based on the hold transition pattern indicated by the hold effect control command received from the effect control board 102.

(Final mode determination table)
47 to 51 are views showing a final mode determination table selected when determining the final mode.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a final mode determination table 1 stored in the sub ROM 102b and selected when the effect mode A is set.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a final mode determination table 2 stored in the sub ROM 102b and selected when the effect mode B and the effect mode E are set.
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a final mode determination table 3 stored in the sub ROM 102b and selected when the effect mode C is set.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a final mode determination table 4 stored in the sub ROM 102b and selected when the effect mode D is set.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a final mode determination table 5 stored in the sub ROM 102b and selected when the effect mode F is set.

The final mode determination table shown in FIGS. 47 to 51 is based on the preliminary determination result, the start opening winning designation command from the main control board 101, and the final mode determination random number value (0 to 99) for determining the final mode. The random number determination value ratio and the final aspect data determined according to the final aspect determination random number value are associated with each other, and the final aspect based on the final aspect data is described as a reference.
The final mode determination random number values (0 to 99) are allocated so as to be the random number determination value ratios shown in FIGS. 47 to 51.

In the present embodiment, the types of the final embodiment are displayed in white, which is a normal mode as a normal reference, and in blue, which is a special mode 1 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. The one displayed in green, which is a special aspect 2 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the special aspect 1, and the red color, which is a special embodiment 3 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the special aspect 2. The one displayed in gold, the one displayed in gold, which is a special aspect 4 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher than the special aspect 3, and the rainbow color, which is a special aspect 5 notifying that the jackpot winning is confirmed. There are 6 types of items displayed in.
That is, the expected degree of jackpot in the normal aspect and the special aspects 1 to 5 is higher in the order of white <blue <green <red <gold <rainbow color (big hit confirmed).
Further, the special aspect 5 (rainbow color) is a special effect (so-called premium effect) in which the random number determination value ratio is set extremely lower than that of the other aspects (normal aspect, special aspects 1 to 4).

The normal aspect and the special aspect 1 are assigned a random number determination value ratio so that they can be selected regardless of whether the preliminary determination result has no reach or has a reach. A random number determination value ratio is assigned to the special aspect 3, the special aspect 4, and the special aspect 5 so that they are selected only when the pre-determination result has reach. That is, the special aspect 2 to the special aspect 5 are reach confirmation effects for notifying that the reach is performed. Further, the special aspect 5 is a jackpot confirmation effect because the random number determination value ratio is assigned so that it is selected only when the preliminary determination result is the first jackpot or the second jackpot.

The final mode determination table 3 shown in FIG. 49 is compared with other final mode determination tables (final mode determination table 1, final mode determination table 2, final mode determination table 4, final mode determination table 5). A random number determination value ratio is assigned so that the special aspect 4 can be easily selected. That is, the effect mode C has a reach confirmed effect (special mode 2 to special mode 4) as compared with other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode D, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). ) Is easier to execute (select).

It should be noted that the final aspect determination table 3 makes it easier to select the special aspects 2 to 4 (reach determination effect) than the other final aspect determination tables (final aspect determination tables 1, 2, 4, 5). It suffices if a random number determination value ratio is assigned, and the random number determination value ratios of the special aspects 2 to 4 (reach confirmation effect) of the other final aspect determination tables (final aspect determination tables 1, 2, 4, 5) are The ratio may be different for each final mode determination table (final mode determination table 1, 2, 4, 5), or the same ratio may be used.

Further, the final mode determination table 4 shown in FIG. 50 has a special aspect as compared with other final mode determination tables (final mode determination table 1, final mode determination table 2, final mode determination table 3, final mode determination table 5). A random number determination value ratio is assigned so that 5 can be easily selected. That is, the effect mode D is a special effect (special mode 5 (so-called premium effect)) as compared with other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). ) Is easier to execute (select).

It should be noted that the final aspect determination table 4 is more likely to select the special aspect 5 (special effect (so-called premium effect)) than the other final aspect determination tables (final aspect determination tables 1 to 3, final aspect determination table 5). It suffices as long as the random number determination value ratio is allocated as described above, and the random number of the special aspect 5 (special effect (so-called premium effect)) of the other final aspect determination table (final aspect determination table 1 to 3, final aspect determination table 5). The determination value ratio may be different for each final mode determination table (final mode determination tables 1 to 3, final mode determination table 5), or may be the same ratio.

(Pending transition pattern determination table)
52 to 53 are diagrams showing a hold transition pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b and referred to (selected) when the transition pattern until the hold image becomes the final mode is determined.

In the hold transition pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 52 to 53, the start opening winning designation command from the main control board 101, the final mode data, the special figure hold number, and the hold shift pattern for determining the hold shift pattern are displayed. The random number determination value ratio based on the determination random number values (0 to 99) and the hold transfer pattern data indicating the transfer pattern up to the final aspect are associated with each other, and the contents of the hold transfer pattern are described for reference.
The random number values (0 to 99) for determining the hold transition pattern are allocated so as to be the ratio of the random number determination values shown in FIGS. 52 to 53.

The "→" in the hold transition pattern content column indicates the shift (movement display) of the hold image, and each time the change display that is currently being performed ends and the hold image shifts, the hold image changes according to the "→". It will change. For example, if a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port and the hold transition pattern is determined to be A0460 (special aspect 1 → special aspect 3 → special aspect 5) in step S1306-19, the hold displayed by the winning is displayed. The image is displayed in blue, which is the special aspect 1, and when the current variation display ends, the reserved image is shifted, the display changes from blue to red, which is the special aspect 3, and further, it is currently performed. When the variable display ends, the reserved image is shifted, and the display changes from red to rainbow color, which is the special aspect 5.

Here, the variation effect pattern determination table 1 to the variation effect pattern determination table 10 (FIGS. 54 to 63) used in the variation effect pattern determination process (FIGS. 36 to 37) described later will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 37, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a is set with this special figure variation pattern designation command in the current gaming state. The process of determining the variation effect pattern from the effect mode and the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode is performed.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a variable effect pattern determination table 1 stored in the sub ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which will be described later.
FIG. 55 shows a variation effect pattern determination table 2 associated with the effect mode B1 stored in the sub ROM 102b, which can be set by the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state described later. It is a figure which shows.
FIG. 56 is a variation effect pattern determination table 3 associated with the effect mode C1 stored in the sub ROM 102b, which can be set by the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state described later. It is a figure which shows.
FIG. 57 is a variation effect pattern determination table 4 associated with the effect mode D1 stored in the sub ROM 102b, which can be set by the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state described later. It is a figure which shows.
FIG. 58 is a variation effect pattern determination table 5 associated with the effect mode E1 stored in the sub ROM 102b, which can be set by the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state described later. It is a figure which shows.
FIG. 59 is associated with the effect mode B2 stored in the sub ROM 102b and set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which is set to the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table.
FIG. 60 is associated with the effect mode C2 stored in the sub ROM 102b and set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which is set to the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table.
FIG. 61 is associated with the effect mode D2, which is stored in the sub ROM 102b and is set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which is set to the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table.
FIG. 62 is associated with the effect mode E2 stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which is set to the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table.
FIG. 63 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode F set in the special figure variation number of 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. It is a figure which shows.

In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 54 to 63, the special symbol determination result (determination result of jackpot determination), the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, and the variation corresponding to the special figure variation time are displayed. Based on the effect time (s) of the effect, the variation effect pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the variation effect pattern, the variation effect pattern determined according to the variation effect pattern determination value, and the variation effect pattern. The presence / absence of execution (execution (○), non-execution (×)) of each special effect in the variation effect is associated, and the effect content of the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern is described as a reference.
The fluctuation effect pattern determination values (0 to 99) are appropriately allocated so as to be the random number determination value ratios shown in FIGS. 54 to 63.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 1 (effect mode A))
The variable effect pattern determination table 1 associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. 54 is expected to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. As a variable effect pattern in which the expectation of winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is different in order to give to a person, a variable effect pattern in which super reach is executed after execution of normal reach and a variable effect pattern in which special reach is executed after execution of normal reach. It has a pattern and a variable effect pattern in which super reach is executed after normal reach is executed, and then special reach is executed.
Further, in order to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not to win the third big hit or small hit, the player has a variable effect pattern for executing the challenge reach.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A of FIG. 54, when "E6H00H" or "E7H00H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost. Is determined to be any one of "variable effect pattern A-001" to "variable effect pattern A-003".

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern A-001" to "Variable effect pattern A-003", a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed in a short variable effect time of 4 seconds ("Signal variation A-1" to "Variable effect pattern A-1" to ". Symbol variation A-3 "), this is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H01H" or "E7H01H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-004" to "variation effect pattern A-006". Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-004" to "variable effect pattern A-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are variedly displayed in the variable effect time of 8 seconds ("symbol variation A-4" to "design". Fluctuation A-6 "), it is a fluctuation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H02H" or "E7H02H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-007" to "variation effect pattern A-009" are determined. Is determined.

The variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-007" to "variable effect pattern A-009" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner in a variable effect time of 12 seconds ("symbol variation A-7" to "symbol variation". A-9 "), it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

When "E6H03H" or "E7H03H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-010" to "variation effect pattern A-012" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-010" to "variable effect pattern A-012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. It is a variable effect that performs normal reach (“normal reach 1” to “normal reach 3”) to stop and display with, and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H04H" or "E7H04H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-013" to "variation effect pattern A-015" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern A-013" to "Variable effect pattern A-015", the character challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the sword of the target item from multiple treasure chests after the symbol changes. A challenge reach ("Challenge Reach 1" to "Challenge Reach 3") is performed to suggest that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item to be acquired, and the judgment of the jackpot judgment is made. It is a variable effect that informs that the result is a loss.

When "E6H05H" or "E7H05H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-016" to "variation effect pattern A-018" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern A-016" to "Variable effect pattern A-018", the character challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the cloak of the target item from multiple treasure chests after the symbol changes. A challenge reach ("Challenge Reach 4" to "Challenge Reach 6") is performed to suggest that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item to be acquired, and the judgment of the jackpot judgment is made. It is a variable effect that informs that the result is a loss.

When "E6H06H" or "E7H06H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-019" to "variation effect pattern A-022" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-019" to "variable effect pattern A-022", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. Performs normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performs super reach ("super reach 1" to "super reach 4"), which has a higher expectation for a jackpot than normal reach, and determines the jackpot. This is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of is a loss.

When "E6H07H" or "E7H07H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-023" to "variation effect pattern A-026" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-023" to "variable effect pattern A-026", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. Performs normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performs special reach ("special reach 1" to "special reach 4") that has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach and super reach. , It is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When "E6H08H" or "E7H08H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern A-027" to "variation effect pattern A-030" One of them will be decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-027" to "variable effect pattern A-030", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. After performing a normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performing a super reach ("super reach 1" to "super reach 4") that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach. This is a variable effect in which a special reach (“Special Reach 1” to “Special Reach 4”), which has a higher expectation for a big hit than a super reach, is performed, and the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss.

When "E6H09H" or "E7H09H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern A-031" to "variation effect pattern A-034" are determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-031" to "variable effect pattern A-034", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. Performs normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performs super reach ("super reach 1" to "super reach 4"), which has a higher expectation for a jackpot than normal reach, and determines the jackpot. It is a variable effect that informs that the judgment result of is a big hit.

When "E6H0AH" or "E7H0AH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern A-035" to "variation effect pattern A-038" Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-035" to "variable effect pattern A-038", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. Performs normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performs special reach ("special reach 1" to "special reach 4") that has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach and super reach. , It is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern A-039" to "variation effect pattern A-042" Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A-039" to "variable effect pattern A-042", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value. After performing a normal reach ("normal reach 1" to "normal reach 4") that stops and displays at, and then performing a super reach ("super reach 1" to "super reach 4") that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach. This is a variable effect in which a special reach (“Special Reach 1” to “Special Reach 4”), which has a higher expectation for a big hit than a super reach, is performed, and the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a big hit.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

When "E6H0FH" or "E7H0FH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern A-055" to "variation effect pattern A-057" are determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern A-055" to "Variable effect pattern A-057", after the symbol changes, the character challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the sword of the target item from multiple treasure chests, and the character challenges the treasure hunt game. A challenge reach ("Challenge Reach 1" to "Challenge Reach 3") is performed to suggest that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item to be acquired, and the judgment of the jackpot judgment is made. It is a variable effect that notifies that the result is the third big hit or small hit.

When "E6H10H" or "E7H10H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern A-058" to "variation effect pattern A-060" are determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern A-058" to "Variable effect pattern A-060", the character challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the cloak of the target item from multiple treasure chests after the symbol changes. A challenge reach ("Challenge Reach 4" to "Challenge Reach 6") is performed to suggest that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, a third jackpot or a small hit depending on the item to be acquired, and the judgment of the jackpot judgment is made. It is a variable effect that notifies that the result is the third big hit or small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, "variable effect pattern A-001" to "variable effect pattern A-066" have "line notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" as special effects. , And information indicating the execution (○) and non-execution (×) of the “decision effect A” are associated with each other.

Here, as will be described later, the "line notice" is a big hit game by displaying on the image display device 13 an effect image in which a character described later speaks any of a plurality of lines having different expectations for the big hit. It is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing the above and gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of the big hit is a big hit. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" in "line notice A" is executed as "line notice".

Further, as will be described later, the "character notice" is to notify the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying an image of any of a plurality of characters having different expectations for the jackpot on the image display device 13. It is a notice production that gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of the big hit is a big hit. In the production mode A, as described later, any one of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" in "Character notice A" is executed as "Character notice".

Further, as will be described later, the "development notice" depends on the state of the effect button 17A (non-projecting state or protruding state), or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A. , Notifies the possibility of developing from the current production to the next production with higher expectations for the jackpot, and also informs the possibility of executing the jackpot game, and the expectation that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is a notice production to give. In the effect mode A, as described later, the "development notice A1" or the "development notice A2" of the "development notice A" is executed as the "development notice".

Further, the "decision effect" is an effect of notifying the decision of the winning of the big hit, as will be described later, and when the first big hit or the second big hit is won, the first decorative member 16A is moved. In the case of loss, the first decorative member 16A is not operated. In the effect mode A, as described later, the “decision effect A1” or the “decision effect A2” of the “decision effect A” is executed as the “decision effect”.

As shown in FIG. 54, for example, when the special symbol determination result is "variation effect pattern A-031", "line notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" are executed (○), " Information to the effect of non-execution (x) of "decision effect A" is associated.
When the sub CPU 102a determines "variable effect pattern A-031" in step S1313-26 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1313-28, "line notice A" and "character notice" are used as special effects. Confirm that "A" and "Development Notice A" will be executed.

The variable production performed in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, which makes it easier to win a big hit than in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, is a simple production that does not overheat with the advance notice production.
Further, the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, effect mode D1) performed with the special figure variation number of 1 to 30 times so as not to make the variation effect of up to 84 times performed in this high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state redundant. The effect mode E1), the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, effect mode D2, effect mode E2) performed with the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times, and the effect mode F performed with the special figure variation number of 75 to 84 times. I try to produce different effects.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 2 (effect mode B1))
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table 2 associated with the effect mode B1 of FIG. 55 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving game in which the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state. This is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed when the effect mode B1 is set with the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the state.

In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a feeling of expectation that it will be easy to win a big hit. Therefore, in the effect mode B1, in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period when the number of changes in the special figure is small, the change in the effect mode A is changed in the number of changes in the special figure from 1 to 30 times. The content of the production is simpler than the production.

In the effect mode B1, if the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure variation time is higher than that of the effect mode A so that the variation effect of the next special figure variation number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a high rate of variation effect pattern of variation effect of 2 seconds. In addition, when the character develops into reach after the change of the special effect symbol, the variable effect of executing "Character Reach" (Character Reach B-1 to Character Reach B-4) in which the character appearing only in the effect mode B appears. A variable production pattern that executes a "music reach" (music reach B-1 to music reach B-2) in which a character that appears only in the production mode B1 sings a song, and a variable production pattern that appears only in the production mode B1. It has a variable effect pattern for executing "VS reach" (VS reach B-1 to VS reach B-3) in which characters fight each other.

Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table 2 associated with the effect mode B1, as shown in FIG. 55, random number determination of the determination patterns 1 to 7 is performed as a random number determination value ratio for determining the variation effect pattern. Value ratios are associated.

Here, the determination pattern 1 means that the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B is not stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and all the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B is stored. It is a random number judgment value ratio to be referred to when it is.

The determination pattern 2 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 3 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-2 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 4 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-3 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 5 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-1 and VS reach B-2 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 6 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-1 and VS reach B-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 7 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-2 and VS reach B-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table 2 associated with the effect mode B1 of FIG. 55, "E6H30H" or "E7H30H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. In that case, the "variable effect pattern B1-001" or the "variable effect pattern B1-002" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-001" and "variable effect pattern B1-002", a plurality of special effect symbols are variedly displayed in a short variable effect time of 2 seconds ("symbol variation B-1", "symbol variation B-1", "! Symbol variation B-2 "), this is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H31H" or "E7H31H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-003" or "variation effect pattern B1-004" is determined. Is decided. If "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-005" or "variation effect pattern B1-006" is determined. Is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-003" to "variable effect pattern B1-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation B-3", "symbol variation B-4", "design". Fluctuation B-5 ”,“ Symbol variation B-6 ”), is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-007" or "variation effect pattern B1-008" is used. It is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern B1-007" and "Variable effect pattern B1-008", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-1" and "character reach B-2") and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-009" or "variation effect pattern B1-010" is selected. It is determined.

In the variable production of "variable production pattern B1-009" and "variable production pattern B1-010", a plurality of special production symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach ("" It is a variable effect that performs "music reach B-1" and "music reach B-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H35H" or "E7H35H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-011" or "variation effect pattern B1-012" is used. It is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-011" and "variable effect pattern B1-012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-3" and "character reach B-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B1-013", "variation effect pattern B1-014", or The "variable effect pattern B1-015" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-013" to "variable effect pattern B1-015", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other in VS reach. ("VS reach B-1", "VS reach B-2", "VS reach B-3") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H37H" or "E7H37H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern B1-016" or "variation effect pattern B1-017" is determined. Is decided. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H38H" or "E7H38H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B1-018" or the "variation effect pattern B1-019" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H39H". "" Or "E7H39H" is determined, "variable effect pattern B1-020", "variable effect pattern B1-022", or "variable effect pattern B1-022" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-016" and "variable effect pattern B1-017", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-1" and "character reach B-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-018" and "variable effect pattern B1-019", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode B sings a song. ("Music reach B-1", "Music reach B-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-020" to "variable effect pattern B1-022", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other. It is a variable effect that performs VS reach (“VS reach B-1”, “VS reach B-2”, “VS reach B-3”) and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

When "E6H3DH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern B1-030" or "variation effect pattern B1-031" is determined. To.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B1-030" and "variable effect pattern B1-031", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-3" and "character reach B-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, "development notice B1" and "decision effect B1" are executed as special effects in "variable effect pattern B1-001" to "variable effect pattern B1-033" (○). , Information to the effect of non-execution (x) is associated.

For example, the special symbol determination result "variation effect pattern B1-016" is associated with information indicating that "development notice B1" is executed (○) and "decision effect B1" is not executed (x). ..
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern B1-016" in step S1313-26 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, the sub CPU 102a executes "development notice B1" as a special effect in step S1313-28. To confirm.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 3 (effect mode C1))
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table 3 associated with the effect mode C1 of FIG. 56 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving game in which the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state. This is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed when the effect mode C1 is set with the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the state.

In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a feeling of expectation that it will be easy to win a big hit. Therefore, in the effect mode C1, in order to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period when the number of changes in the special figure is small, the variation in the effect mode A is changed in the number of changes in the special figure from 1 to 30 times. The content of the production is simpler than the production.

In the effect mode C1, if the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure variation time is higher than that of the effect mode A so that the variation effect of the next special figure variation number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a high rate of variation effect pattern of variation effect of 2 seconds. In addition, when the character develops into reach after the change of the special effect symbol, the variable effect of executing "Character Reach" (Character Reach C-1 to Character Reach C-4) in which the character appearing only in the effect mode C appears. A variable production pattern that executes a "music reach" (music reach C-1 to music reach C-2) in which a character that appears only in the production mode C sings a song, and a variable production pattern that appears only in the production mode C. It has a variable effect pattern for executing "VS reach" (VS reach C-1 to VS reach C-3) in which characters fight each other.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the variation effect pattern determination table 3 associated with the effect mode C1, the random number determination value ratios of the determination patterns 1 to 7 are used as the random number determination value ratios for determining the variation effect pattern. Are associated with each other.

Here, the determination pattern 1 means that the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C is not stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C is all stored. It is a random number judgment value ratio to be referred to when it is.

The determination pattern 2 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach C-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C.

The determination pattern 3 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach C-2 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C.

The determination pattern 4 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach C-3 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C.

The determination pattern 5 is a random number referred to when VS reach C-1 and VS reach C-2 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 6 is a random number referred to when VS reach C-1 and VS reach C-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 7 is a random number referred to when VS reach C-2 and VS reach C-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode C. It is a judgment value ratio.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table 3 associated with the effect mode C1 of FIG. 56, "E6H30H" or "E7H30H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. In that case, "variable effect pattern C1-001" or "variable effect pattern C1-002" is determined. When "E6H31H" or "E7H31H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C1-003" or "variation effect pattern C1-004" is determined. When "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C1-005" or "variation effect pattern C1-006" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-001" to "variable effect pattern C1-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation C-1", "symbol variation C-2", "design". Fluctuation C-3 ”,“ Symbol variation C-4 ”,“ Symbol variation C-5 ”,“ Symbol variation C-6 ”), is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern C1-007" or "variation effect pattern C1-008" is used. It is determined. When "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C1-009" or "variation effect pattern C1-010" is determined. When "E6H35H" or "E7H35H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C1-011" or "variation effect pattern C1-012" is determined. When "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C1-013", "variation effect pattern C1-014", or "variation effect pattern C1-015" is determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-007" and "variable effect pattern C1-008", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode C appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach C-1" and "character reach C-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-009" and "variable effect pattern C1-010", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode C sings a song. ("Music reach C-1", "Music reach C-2") is performed, and it is a variable production that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-011" and "variable effect pattern C1-012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode C appears (character reach). "Character reach C-3", "Character reach C-4") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-013" to "variable effect pattern C1-015", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode C fight each other. It is a variable effect that performs VS reach (“VS reach C-1”, “VS reach C-2”, “VS reach C-3”) and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H37H" or "E7H37H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern C1-016" or "variation effect pattern C1-017" is determined. Is decided. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H38H" or "E7H38H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C1-018" or the "variation effect pattern C1-019" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H39H". "" Or "E7H39H" is determined, "variable effect pattern C1-020", "variable effect pattern C1-022", or "variable effect pattern C1-022" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-016" and "variable effect pattern C1-017", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode C appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach C-1" and "character reach C-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-018" and "variable effect pattern C1-019", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode C sings a song. ("Music reach C-1", "Music reach C-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-020" to "variable effect pattern C1-022", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode C fight each other. It is a variable effect that performs VS reach (“VS reach C-1”, “VS reach C-2”, “VS reach C-3”) and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

When "E6H3DH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern C1-030" or "variation effect pattern C1-031" is determined. To.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern C1-030" and "variable effect pattern C1-031", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode C appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach C-3" and "character reach C-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, "development notice C1" and "decision effect C1" are executed as special effects for "variable effect pattern C1-001" to "variable effect pattern C1-033" (○). , Information to the effect of non-execution (x) is associated.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 4 (effect mode D1))
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table 4 associated with the effect mode D1 of FIG. 57 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving game in which the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state. This is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed when the effect mode D1 is set with the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the state.

In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a feeling of expectation that it will be easy to win a big hit. Therefore, in the effect mode D1, in order to give the player a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period when the number of changes in the special figure is small, the change in the effect mode A is changed in the number of changes in the special figure from 1 to 30 times. The content of the production is simpler than the production.

In the effect mode D1, if the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure variation time is higher than that of the effect mode A so that the variation effect of the next special figure variation number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a high rate of variation effect pattern of variation effect of 2 seconds. In addition, when the character develops into reach after the change of the special effect symbol, the variable effect of executing "Character Reach" (Character Reach D-1 to Character Reach D-4) in which the character appearing only in the effect mode D appears. A variable production pattern that executes a "music reach" (music reach D-1 to music reach D-2) in which a character that appears only in the production mode D sings a song, and a variable production pattern that appears only in the production mode D. It has a variable effect pattern for executing "VS reach" (VS reach D-1 to VS reach D-3) in which characters fight each other.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the variation effect pattern determination table 4 associated with the effect mode D1, the random number determination value ratios of the determination patterns 1 to 7 are used as the random number determination value ratios for determining the variation effect pattern. Are associated with each other.

Here, the determination pattern 1 means that the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D is not stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and all the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D are stored. It is a random number judgment value ratio to be referred to when it is.

The determination pattern 2 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach D-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D.

The determination pattern 3 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach D-2 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D.

The determination pattern 4 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach D-3 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D.

The determination pattern 5 is a random number referred to when VS reach D-1 and VS reach D-2 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 6 is a random number referred to when VS reach D-1 and VS reach D-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 7 is a random number referred to when VS reach D-2 and VS reach D-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode D. It is a judgment value ratio.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table 4 associated with the effect mode D1 of FIG. 57, "E6H30H" or "E7H30H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. In that case, the "variable effect pattern D1-001" or the "variable effect pattern D1-002" is determined. When "E6H31H" or "E7H31H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern D1-003" or "variation effect pattern D1-004" is determined. When "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern D1-005" or "variation effect pattern D1-006" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-001" to "variable effect pattern D1-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation D-1", "symbol variation D-2", "design". Fluctuation D-3 ”,“ Symbol variation D-4 ”,“ Symbol variation D-5 ”,“ Symbol variation D-6 ”), is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern D1-007" or "variation effect pattern D1-008" is used. It is determined. When "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern D1-009" or "variation effect pattern D1-010" is determined. When "E6H35H" or "E7H35H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern D1-011" or "variation effect pattern D1-012" is determined. When "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern D1-013", "variation effect pattern D1-014", or "variation effect pattern D1-015" is determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-007" and "variable effect pattern D1-008", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode D appears ("Character"). "Reach D-1" and "Character reach D-2") are performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-009" and "variable effect pattern D1-010", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode D sings a song. ("Music reach D-1", "Music reach D-2") is performed, and it is a variable production that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-011" and "variable effect pattern D1-012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode D appears (character reach). "Character reach D-3", "Character reach D-4") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-013" to "variable effect pattern D1-015", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode D fight each other. It is a variable effect that performs VS reach (“VS reach D-1”, “VS reach D-2”, “VS reach D-3”) and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H37H" or "E7H37H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern D1-016" or "variation effect pattern D1-017" is determined. Is decided. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H38H" or "E7H38H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern D1-018" or the "variation effect pattern D1-019" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H39H". "" Or "E7H39H" is determined, "variable effect pattern D1-020", "variable effect pattern D1-022", or "variable effect pattern D1-022" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-016" and "variable effect pattern D1-017", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode D appears ("Character"). "Reach D-1" and "Character reach D-2") are performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-018" and "variable effect pattern D1-019", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode D sings a song. ("Music reach D-1", "Music reach D-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-020" to "variable effect pattern D1-022", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode C fight each other. It is a variable effect that performs VS reach (“VS reach D-1”, “VS reach D-2”, “VS reach D-3”) and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

When "E6H3DH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern D1-030" or "variation effect pattern D1-031" is determined. To.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern D1-030" and "variable effect pattern D1-031", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode D appears ("character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach D-3" and "character reach D-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode D, "development notice D1" and "decision effect D1" are executed as special effects in "variable effect pattern D1-001" to "variable effect pattern D1-033" (○). , Information indicating non-execution (x) is associated.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 5 (effect mode E1))
The variable effect pattern included in the variable effect pattern determination table 5 associated with the effect mode E1 of FIG. 58 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving game in which the winning probability of the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state. This is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed when the effect mode D1 is set with the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times of the state.

In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a feeling of expectation that it will be easy to win a big hit. Therefore, in the effect mode E1, in order to give the player a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period when the number of changes in the special figure is small, the change in the effect mode A is changed in the number of changes in the special figure from 1 to 30 times. The content of the production is simpler than the production.

In the effect mode E1, if the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure variation time is higher than that of the effect mode A so that the variation effect of the next special figure variation number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a high rate of variation effect pattern of variation effect of 2 seconds. In addition, when the character develops into reach after the change of the special effect symbol, the variable effect of executing "Character Reach" (Character Reach E-1 to Character Reach E-4) in which the character appearing only in the effect mode E appears. A variable production pattern that executes a "music reach" (music reach E-1 to music reach E-2) in which a character that appears only in the production mode E sings a song, and a variable production pattern that appears only in the production mode E. It has a variable production pattern that executes "story reach" (story reach E-1 to story reach E-3), which is the content of going on a journey to find a pet dog whose character has disappeared.
The difference between the variable effect pattern determination table 5 and the variable effect pattern determination table 2 to the variable effect pattern determination table 4 is that the variable effect pattern determination table 5 does not have VS reach.

As shown in FIG. 58, "E6H30H" or "E7H30H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command in the variation effect pattern determination table 5 associated with the effect mode E1 when the special symbol determination result is lost. If so, the "variable effect pattern E1-001" or the "variable effect pattern E1-002" is determined. When "E6H31H" or "E7H31H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern E1-003" or "variation effect pattern E1-004" is determined. When "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern E1-005" or "variation effect pattern E1-006" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-001" to "variable effect pattern E1-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation E-1", "symbol variation E-2", "design". Fluctuation E-3 ”,“ Symbol variation E-4 ”,“ Symbol variation E-5 ”,“ Symbol variation E-6 ”), is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern E1-007" or "variation effect pattern E1-008" is used. It is determined. When "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern E1-009" or "variation effect pattern E1-010" is determined. When "E6H35H" or "E7H35H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern E1-011" or "variation effect pattern E1-012" is determined. When "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern E1-013", "variation effect pattern E1-014", or "variation effect pattern E1-015" is determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern E1-007" and "Variable effect pattern E1-008", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode E appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach E-1" and "character reach E-2") and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-009" and "variable effect pattern E1-010", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode E sings a song. ("Music reach E-1", "Music reach E-2") is performed, and it is a variable production that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-011" and "variable effect pattern E1-012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode E appears (character reach). "Character reach E-3", "Character reach E-4") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.
In addition, the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-013" to "variable effect pattern E1-015" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner, and then searches for a pet dog in which the character appearing only in the effect mode E disappears. It is a variable production that performs story reach ("story reach 1", "story reach 2", "story reach 3") of the contents to go on a trip, and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H37H" or "E7H37H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern E1-016" or "variation effect pattern E1-017" is determined. Is decided. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H38H" or "E7H38H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern E1-018" or "variation effect pattern E1-019" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H39H". "" Or "E7H39H" is determined, "variable effect pattern E1-020", "variable effect pattern E1-022", or "variable effect pattern E1-022" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-016" and "variable effect pattern E1-017", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode E appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach E-1" and "character reach E-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
Further, in the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-018" and "variable effect pattern E1-019", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the music reach in which the character appearing only in the effect mode E sings a song. ("Music reach E-1", "Music reach E-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.
In addition, the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-020" to "variable effect pattern E1-022" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner, and then searches for a pet dog in which the character appearing only in the effect mode E disappears. It is a variable production that performs story reach ("story reach 1", "story reach 2", "story reach 3") of the contents to go on a trip and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a big hit.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

When "E6H3DH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern E1-030" or "variation effect pattern E1-031" is determined. To.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern E1-030" and "variable effect pattern E1-031", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode E appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach E-3" and "character reach E-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode E, "development notice E1" and "decision effect E1" are executed as special effects for "variable effect pattern E1-001" to "variable effect pattern E1-033" (○). , Information indicating non-execution (x) is associated.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 6 (effect mode B2))
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table 6 associated with the effect mode B2 of FIG. 59 is a variation of the variation effect performed after the special figure variation number of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is 31 to 74 times. It is a production pattern.
The effect mode B2 is different from the effect mode B1 in that the effect mode B1 does not have the "music reach".

Further, similarly to the variation effect pattern determination table 2 associated with the effect mode B1 of FIG. 55, the variation effect pattern determination table 6 associated with the effect mode B2 of FIG. 59 is used to determine the variation effect pattern. As the random number determination value ratio of, the determination pattern 1 to the determination pattern 7 are associated with each other.

Here, the determination pattern 1 means that the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B is not stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and all the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B is stored. It is a random number judgment value ratio to be referred to when it is.

The determination pattern 2 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 3 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-2 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 4 is a random number determination value ratio to be referred to when only VS reach B-3 is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c among the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B.

The determination pattern 5 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-1 and VS reach B-2 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 6 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-1 and VS reach B-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

The determination pattern 7 is a random number referred to when VS reach B-2 and VS reach B-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the VS reach that can be executed in the effect mode B. It is a judgment value ratio.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B2 of FIG. 59, when "E6H50H" or "E7H50H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. "Variable effect pattern B2-001" or "Variable effect pattern B2-002" is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B2-001" and "variable effect pattern B2-002", a plurality of special effect symbols are variedly displayed in a short variable effect time of 2 seconds ("symbol variation B-1", "symbol variation B-1", "! Symbol variation B-2 "), this is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H51H" or "E7H51H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B2-003" or "variation effect pattern B2-004" is determined. Is decided. If "E6H52H" or "E7H52H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B2-005" or "variation effect pattern B2-006" is determined. Is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B2-003" to "variable effect pattern B2-006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation B-3", "symbol variation B-4", "design". Fluctuation B-5 ”,“ Symbol variation B-6 ”), is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H53H" or "E7H53H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B2-007" or "variation effect pattern B2-008" is used. It is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H54H" or "E7H54H" is determined, "variation effect pattern B2-009" or "variation effect pattern B2-010" is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H55H" or "E7H55H" is determined, "variation effect pattern B2-011", "variation effect pattern B2-012" or "variation effect pattern B2-013". Is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern B2-007" to "Variable effect pattern B2-010", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("Character"). "Reach B-1", "Character Reach B-2", "Character Reach B-3", "Character Reach B-4") are performed, and it is a variable production that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. ..

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B2-011" to "variable effect pattern B2-013", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight against each other. ("VS reach B-1", "VS reach B-2", "VS reach B-3") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H56H" or "E7H56H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern B2-014" or "variation effect pattern B2-015" is determined. Is decided. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H57H" or "E7H57H" is determined, "variation effect pattern B2-016", "variation effect pattern B2-017" or "variation effect pattern B2-018" is displayed. It is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B2-014" and "variable effect pattern B2-015", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-1" and "character reach B-2") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B2-016" to "variable effect pattern B2-018", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other in VS reach. ("VS reach B-1", "VS reach B-2", "VS reach B-3") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

If "E6H5AH" or "E7H5AH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern B2-024" or "variation effect pattern B2-025" is determined. Is decided.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern B2-024" and "Variable effect pattern B2-025", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and then a character that appears only in the effect mode B appears ("Character"). It is a variable effect that performs "reach B-3" and "character reach B-4") and notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is different.

In the variable effect pattern determination table 6 of the effect mode B2, "development notice B2" and "decision effect B2" are executed as special effects in "variable effect pattern B2-001" to "variable effect pattern B2-027". Information to the effect of 〇) or non-execution (×) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result "variation effect pattern B2-014" is associated with information to the effect that "development notice B2" and "decision effect B2" are executed (◯).
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern B2-014" in step S1313-26 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1313-28, the "development notice B2" and the "decision effect" are set as special effects. Confirm that "B2" is executed.

The variable effect pattern determination table 7 (effect mode C2), the variable effect pattern determination table 8 (effect mode D2), and the variable effect pattern determination table 9 (effect mode E2) are the variable effect pattern determination table 6 (effect mode B2). Similarly, the difference between the variable effect pattern determination table 3 (effect mode C1), the variable effect pattern determination table 4 (effect mode D1), and the variable effect pattern determination table 5 (effect mode E1) is "music reach". It is a point that does not have, and is the same except for the above. Therefore, the description of the variable effect pattern determination table 7 (effect mode C2) to the variable effect pattern determination table 9 (effect mode E2) will be omitted.

(Variable effect pattern determination table 10 (effect mode F))
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table 10 associated with the effect mode F of FIG. 63 is a variation of the variation effect performed after the special figure variation number of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is 75 to 84 times. It is a production pattern.

This effect mode F has a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when a big hit is not won in the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, or the effect mode E2. As a variable effect pattern having a reach effect different from that of the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, and the effect mode E, the character performing the rock-paper-scissors, which appears only in the effect mode F, is determined to be the opponent of the rock-paper-scissors. It has a variable production pattern of "rock-paper-scissors production" that involves performing rock-paper-scissors a number of times. By such a variation effect of the rock-paper-scissors effect, the player is expected to win the jackpot in a state where the remaining number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state is small.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table 10 associated with the effect mode F of FIG. 63, "E6H70H" or "E7H70H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. In that case, any one of "variable effect pattern F-001" to "variable effect pattern F-003" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern F-001" to "variation effect pattern F-003" is "symbol variation" ("symbol variation F-1" to "symbol variation F-3" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. ") In the meantime, two characters (friend character, opponent's character) perform one rock-paper-scissors game by notifying" Let's win once! " It is a variable effect that is performed and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

When "E6H71H" or "E7H71H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern F-004" to "variation effect pattern F-006" When any of them is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H72H" or "E7H72H" is determined, any of "variation effect pattern F-007" to "variation effect pattern F-009" is determined. When the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H73H" or "E7H73H" is determined, one of "variation effect pattern F-010" to "variation effect pattern F-012" is determined. Will be done.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern F-004" to "variable effect pattern F-012", "rock-paper-scissors reach" is executed after "design variation" to notify that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. Is.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-004" to "Variable effect pattern F-006", "Rock-paper-scissors win twice!" Is notified during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 1" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 3") It is a variable production that informs that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss by performing the production of the content that the ally character loses in the second round of rock-paper-scissors.

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-007" to "Variable effect pattern F-009" notifies "Rock-paper-scissors 3 times win !!" during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 4" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 6") It is a variable production that informs that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss by producing the content that the ally character wins in the second round of rock-paper-scissors and the ally character loses in the third round of rock-paper-scissors.

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-010" to "Variable effect pattern F-012" notifies "Rock-paper-scissors 4 times win !!" during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 7" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 9") In the 2nd and 3rd rounds of rock-paper-scissors, the ally character wins, and in the 4th round, the ally character loses. be.

When "E6H74H" or "E7H74H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit, "variation effect pattern F-013" to "variation effect pattern F-015" When any of the above is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H75H" or "E7H75H" is determined, among "variation effect pattern F-016" to "variation effect pattern F-018". When any of the above is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H76H" or "E7H76H" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern F-019" to "variation effect pattern F-021" is determined. Is determined.

In the variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-013" to "Variable effect pattern F-015", "Rock-paper-scissors win twice !!" is notified during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 1" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 3") Even in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, the effect is that the character of the ally wins, and it is a variable effect that informs that the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a big hit.

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-016" to "Variable effect pattern F-018" notifies "Rock-paper-scissors 3 times win !!" during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 4" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 6"). It is a variable production that informs that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot by performing the production of the content that the ally character wins in succession in the second and third rounds of rock-paper-scissors.

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-019" to "Variable effect pattern F-021" notifies "Rock-paper-scissors 4 times win !!" during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 7" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 9") It is a variable production that informs that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot by performing the production of the content that the ally characters win consecutively in the second to fourth rounds of rock-paper-scissors.

When the special symbol determination result is the second big hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol which is stopped and displayed is different.

If "E6H7AH" or "E7H7AH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern F-031" to "variation effect pattern F-033". When any of the above is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H7BH" or "E7H7BH" is determined, among "variation effect pattern F-034" to "variation effect pattern F-036". If any of them is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H7CH" or "E7H7CH" is determined, one of "variation effect pattern F-537" to "variation effect pattern F-039" is determined. ..

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-031" to "Variable effect pattern F-033" is notified as "Rock-paper-scissors win twice !!" Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 1" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 3") In the second round of rock-paper-scissors, the character of the ally and the character of the opponent will be "Aiko", and the judgment result of the big hit judgment will be the third big hit or the small hit. be.

The variable effect of "variable effect pattern F-034" to "variable effect pattern F-036" is "design variation" ("symbol variation D2-1" to "symbol variation D2-3" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. "), Two characters (friend character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the ally character wins after notifying" Let's win 3 times !! " In the second round of "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 4" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 6"), the ally character wins, and in the third round of rock-paper-scissors, the ally character and the opponent character are "Aiko". It is a variable effect that informs that the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

The variable effect of "Variable effect pattern F-037" to "Variable effect pattern F-039" notifies "Rock-paper-scissors 4 times win !!" during "Design variation" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. Two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the teammate character wins, and then in "rock-paper-scissors reach" ("rock-paper-scissors reach 7" to "rock-paper-scissors reach 9"). In the 2nd and 3rd rounds of rock-paper-scissors, the ally character wins in a row, and in the 4th round of rock-paper-scissors, the ally character and the opponent's character become "Aiko", and the jackpot judgment is made. This is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result is the third big hit or small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In "Variable effect pattern F-001" to "Variable effect pattern F-048", there is information to the effect that "development notice F", "character notice F", and "decision effect F" are executed (○) as special effects. It is associated.
For example, when the special symbol determination result is "variable effect pattern F-013", the execution of "development notice F" (○), the execution of "character notice F" (○), and the execution of "decision effect F" (○). Information to that effect is associated.
When the sub CPU 102a determines "variable effect pattern F-013" in step S1313-26 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1313-28, "development notice F" and "character notice" are used as special effects. Confirm that "F" and "decision effect F" are executed.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 63, in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed from 1 to 30 times. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the variable effect of the effect mode B2 to the effect mode E2, which is executed when the number of fluctuations is 31 to 74 times, than in the variable effect of the effect mode E1, and the effect mode B2 to the effect mode E2. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the variable effect of the effect mode F, which is executed when the number of variations is 75 to 84 times, than in the variable effect.

Further, the variation effect pattern determination table 2 to the variation effect pattern determination table 4 and the variation effect pattern determination table 6 to the variation effect pattern determination table 8 shown in FIGS. 55 to 61 and 59 to 61 show the VS reach of the sub RAM 102c. For VS reach stored in the storage area, the execution rate is low.
For example, in the variation effect pattern determination table 2 of FIG. 55, when VS reach B-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area, the determination pattern 2 is referred to, and the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first. The execution rate of VS reach B-1 in the case of "big hit" is 10%. On the other hand, in the determination pattern 1 when no VS reach is stored in the VS reach storage area, the execution rate of VS reach B-1 is 33% when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot". It has become.

◇ Further, the variation effect pattern determination table 2 to the variation effect pattern determination table 4 and the variation effect pattern determination table 6 to the variation effect pattern determination table 8 shown in FIGS. 55 to 61 and 59 to 61 are stored in the VS reach storage area. The stored VS reach is not executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", and is executed only when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit".
For example, in the variation effect pattern determination table 2 of FIG. 55, when VS reach B-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area, the determination pattern 2 is referred to, and the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. In this case, the execution rate of VS reach B-1 is 0%. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the execution rate of VS reach B-1 is 10%.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 63, in the present embodiment, the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol and the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol have the same effect content, but may be different. .. For example, in the effect modes B, C, and D, VS reach may not be executed in the case of the variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol.

Further, in the case of the effect modes B, C and D, when the VS reach is stored in the VS reach storage area, it may be notified that the VS reach is stored in the variable effect. For example, during the variable production, it may be done such as "Next time, VS reach B-1 will appear and it will be extremely hot !!".
In this case, the notification is given only when it is determined by the preliminary determination that the VS reach in which the VS reach is stored in the VS reach storage area is to be performed in the variation effect performed after the variation effect currently being performed. It may be done, or it may be done when it is not done (so-called ghosting effect).

(Type of each special production)
64 and 65 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 54, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the “effect mode A”. FIG. 64A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 64 (b) shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the table shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the execution ratio (%) of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" as "line notice A" is set, and is used as "character notice A". The execution rate (%) of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is set, and the execution rate (%) of "Development notice A1" to "Development notice A6" as "Development notice A" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" as "decision effect A" is set.

Further, FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. FIG. 65A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “line notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 65B is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “character notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 65 (c) is a diagram showing a “development notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 65 (d) is a diagram showing a “decision effect A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “decision effect A” in the effect mode A.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 54, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 65 is executed in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "line notice A1" is to display the effect image of the "line a1", which is "It's a lot of money !!", on the image display device 13. In this "line notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X11 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image (character a1) described later saying "one thousand dollars !!" as "line a1" ( (See (a-1-4)) in FIG. 89) is displayed on the image display device 13, and the third decorative member 16C is moved from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3” as a movable member. Perform the corresponding effect.

The "line notice A2" displays the effect image of the "line a2", which is "Are you getting 100 cars?", On the image display device 13. In this "line notice A2", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect button 17A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X11 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 17A remains in the non-protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect of "Character a1" described later saying "Hundred cars acquired?" As "Serif a1". A corresponding effect of the content such as displaying an image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 92) on the image display device 13 is executed.

The "line notice A3" is the same as the "line notice A2" except that the effect image of the "line a3", "Is it possible to acquire ten cars?", Is displayed on the image display device 13.

"Serif notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the effect image of "Serif a4" on the image display device 13 at a predetermined timing, "Is one car acquired?", But "Serif notice A2" The content of the production is the same.

"Serif notice A5" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the effect image of "Serif a5" on the image display device 13 at a predetermined timing, except that "Serif a5" is displayed on the image display device 13. The content of the production is the same.

In the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in "line notice A", the execution rate of "line notice A1" is the lowest in the case of loss, and "line notice A1" in the case of loss in the case of a big hit or the like. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" is highest in "Serif notice A1" and becomes lower as "Serif notice A2" to "Serif notice A5". , In "Serif notice A", the execution ratio of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" is set.

"Serif notice A" includes "Serif notice A1" for executing an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A and "Serif notice A2" to "Serif" for executing an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A. It consists of "Notice A5". Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. The execution rate of the "line notice A2" to "line notice A5" to be performed is higher than the execution rate of the "line notice A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "speech notice" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is the operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect of the effect mode A, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing the "character notice A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is high. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A.

The "character notice A1" displays the effect image of the "character a2-1" on the image display device 13. In this "character notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y11 described later). Not done. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "Character a2-1" described later (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 90) is displayed on the image display device. The corresponding effect of the content such as displaying on 13 is executed.

The "character notice A2" displays the effect image of the "character a2-2" on the image display device 13. In this "character notice A2", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y11 described later). However, the state of the effect button 17A is left as a non-protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "Character a2-2" (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 93) described later is displayed. Corresponding effects such as displaying on the image display device 13 are executed.

The "character notice A3" is "character notice A3" except that the effect image of "character a2-3" (see (c-2-4) in FIG. 96) is displayed on the image display device 13 instead of "character a2-2". The content of the production is the same as "Character notice A2".

The "character notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and instead of the "character a2-2", the effect image of the "character notice a2-4" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying, the production content is the same as that of "Character notice A2".

The "character notice A5" does not set the operation validity period, and instead of the "character a2-2", the effect image of the "character notice a2-5" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying, the production content is the same as that of "Character notice A2".

In the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in "character notice A", the execution rate of "character notice A1" is the lowest in the case of loss, and "character notice A1" in the case of loss in the case of a big hit or the like. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is highest in "Character notice A1" and decreases as "Character notice A2" to "Character notice A5". , The execution ratio of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is set.

The "character notice A" is based on the "character notice A1" that displays the effect image of the "character a2-1" on the image display device 13 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A, and the operation of pressing the effect button 17A. It is composed of "character notice A2" to "character notice A5" that display the production images of "character a2-2" to "character a2-5" on the image display device 13. Then, when the ratio is higher than the jackpot or the like, the ratio of executing "Character notice A2" to "Character notice A5" in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 17A is the effect lever. It is higher than the rate at which the "character notice A1" in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "character notice A" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 17A is the effect lever. It is higher than the ratio at which the effect of displaying the character image is executed based on the operation of 19A. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing "Character notice A1" in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and it is based on the operation of the effect button 17A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect in which the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the effect in which the character image is displayed.

The "development notice A1" displays the effect image of the "effect a1" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X12 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, the effect image of the "effect a1" (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 91) is displayed on the image display device 13 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. At the same time, the corresponding effect of the content such as moving the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" is executed.

The "development notice A2" displays the effect image of the "effect a2" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice A2", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the effect button 17A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X12 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 17A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect a2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the second decorative member 16B is displayed as a movable member. Is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the corresponding effect of the content is executed.

The "development notice A3" is produced as "development notice A1" except that the effect image of the "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 instead of the "effect a1" and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

The "development notice A4" has the same effect content as the "development notice A2" except that the effect button 17A is in a non-protruding state during the operation valid period.

"Development notice A5" is produced as "development notice A1" except that the effect image of "effect a2" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 instead of "effect a1" and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

In the "development notice A6", the effect button 17A is placed in a non-protruding state during the operation valid period, and the effect image of the "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 instead of the "effect a2", and the movable member is displayed. The contents of the production are the same as those of "Development Notice A2" except that

In the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in "development notice A", "development notice A1" has the highest expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6". The execution ratio of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is set so as to decrease as "development notice A2" to "development notice A6".

In "development notice A", "development notice A1", "development notice A3", "development notice A5", and operation promotion notice for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A are executed. It is composed of "development notice A2", "development notice A4", and "development notice A6". Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. The execution ratios of "development notice A2", "development notice A4", and "development notice A6" are "development notice A1", "development notice A3", and "development notice A5". Is higher than the execution rate. Therefore, in the "development notice" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is the operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect of the effect mode A, when a big hit or the like occurs, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is high, which is higher than the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. However, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in the variable effect that develops from "super reach" to "special reach", the effect button 17A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation valid period, and "super reach" is obtained. In the variable production that does not develop from "" to "special reach", the execution ratio of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is set so that the production button 17A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation valid period. ing.

The "decision effect A1" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash a1" on the image display device 13 (see (b-3-4) in FIG. 94). ). In this "decision effect A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X22 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash a1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is set to "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from to "moving position 1-2" is executed.

The "decision effect A2" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash a2" on the image display device 13 (see (b-3-4) in FIG. 94). ). In this "decision effect A2", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect button 17A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X22 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 17A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash a2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is "standby". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from "position 1" to "operation position 1-2" is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), in "decision effect A", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" is "decision" rather than "decision effect A2". The execution ratios of the "decision effect A1" and the "decision effect A2" are set so that the "effect A1" is higher. That is, the "decision effect A1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (1st to 3rd big hits, small hits) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

The "decision effect A" is composed of a "decision effect A1" for executing an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A and a "decision effect A2" for executing an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. The execution rate of the "decision effect A2" to be performed is higher than the execution rate of the "decision effect A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which notification is executed. On the other hand, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode A, when the jackpot or the like is a big hit, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and the operation of the effect button 17A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production lever 19A than in the production.

66 and 67 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 55, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the “effect mode B1”. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B1 when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 66 (b) shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B1 when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", "second jackpot", "third jackpot" or "small hit". It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the execution ratios (%) of the "development notice B1-1" and the "development notice B1-2" as the "development notice B1" are set, and the "decision effect" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect B1-1" and "decision effect B1-2" as "B1" is set.

Further, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B1. FIG. 67A is a diagram showing a “development notice B1 information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice B1” in the effect mode B1. FIG. 67B is a diagram showing a “decision effect B1 information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “decision effect B1” in the effect mode B1.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 55, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 67 is executed in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "development notice B1-1" displays the effect image of the "effect b1" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice B1-1", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X41 described later) for validating the operation for the effect button 17A is set, and the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A during the operation valid period is set. Notification is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 102). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect b1" (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 102) is displayed on the image display device 13. Performs a corresponding effect such as displaying on.

The "development notice B1-2" displays the effect image of the "effect b2" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice B1-2", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X41 described later) that enables the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. Notification is executed (see (d-2-2) in FIG. 102). Then, the effect image of the "effect b2" (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 102) is displayed on the image display device 13 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. , And so on.

In the tables of FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), in "development notice B1", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice B1-1" and "development notice B1-2" is "development notice B1-". The execution ratios of "development notice B1-1" and "development notice B1-2" are set so that "2" is higher than "development notice B1-1".

The "development notice B1" includes the "development notice B1-1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed and the "development notice B1-2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. It is composed of. Then, in the effect mode B1 in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of big hits, and when the rate is loss, the effect lever. The execution rate of "development effect B1-2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of "development effect B1-1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. high. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode B1 which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode B1, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

The "decision effect B1-1" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash b1" on the image display device 13 ((d-3-4) in FIG. 103. )reference). In this "decision effect B1-1", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect button 17A is selected during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X42 described later). The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of (see (d-3-2) in FIG. 103) is executed. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash b1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is displayed at the "standby position 1". ”To“ operation position 1-2 ”, and so on.

In the "decision effect B1-2", the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is moved and the effect image of the "flash b2" is displayed on the image display device 13 ((d-3-4) in FIG. 103. )reference). In this "decision effect B1-2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever is selected during the operation valid period (for example, the operation effective period X42 described later). The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed (see (d-3-3) in FIG. 103). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of the "flash b2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is displayed from the "standby position 1" to the "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), in the "decision effect B1", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "decision effect B1-1" and "decision effect B1-2" is "decision effect B1-". The execution ratios of "decision effect B1-1" and "decision effect B1-2" are set so that "decision effect B1-2" is higher than "1". That is, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (1st to 3rd big hits, small hits), the "decision effect B1-1" is higher than the case where the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. It is determined.

The "decision effect B1" is the "decision effect B1-1" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A is executed, and the "decision effect B1-2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. It is composed of. Then, in the effect mode B1 which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the "decision effect B1-2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed determines the operation of the effect button 17A. It is higher than the execution rate of "decision effect B1-1" in which the prompt operation promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B1 which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B1, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

68 and 69 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 59, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the “effect mode B2”. FIG. 68A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B2 when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 68 (b) shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B2 when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), the execution ratios (%) of the "development notice B2-1" and the "development notice B2-2" as the "development notice B2" are set, and the "decision effect" is set. The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect B2-1" and "decision effect B2-2" as "B2" is set.

Further, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B2. FIG. 69A is a diagram showing a “development notice B2 information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice B2” in the effect mode B2. FIG. 69B is a diagram showing a “decision effect B2 information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “determine effect B2” in the effect mode B2.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 59, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 69 is executed in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "development notice B2-1" displays the effect image of the "effect c1" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice B2-1", an operation valid period for validating the operation for the effect button 17A is set, and an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed during the operation valid period. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect c1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect is executed.

The "development notice B2-2" displays the effect image of the "effect c2" on the image display device 13. In this "development notice B2-2", an operation valid period for validating the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed during the operation valid period. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect c2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), in "development notice B2", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice B2-1" and "development notice B2-2" is "development notice B2-". The execution ratios of "development notice B2-1" and "development notice B2-2" are set so that "2" is higher than "development notice B2-1".

The "development notice B2" includes the "development notice B2-1" that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A and the "development notice B2-2" that executes the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is composed of. Then, in the effect mode B2 in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of big hits, and when the rate is loss, the effect lever. The execution rate of "development effect B2-2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of "development effect B2-1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. high. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode B2, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode B2, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

The "decision effect B2-1" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash c1" on the image display device 13. In this "decision effect B2-1", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed during the operation valid period. Will be done. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash c1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is displayed at the "standby position 1". ”To“ operation position 1-2 ”, and so on.

In the "decision effect B2-2", the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is moved, and the effect image of the "flash c2" is displayed on the image display device 13. In this "decision effect B2-2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed during the operation valid period. Will be done. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "flash c2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is displayed from the "standby position 1" to the "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b), in the "decision effect B2", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect B2-1" and the "decision effect B2-2" is the "decision effect B2-". The execution ratios of "decision effect B2-1" and "decision effect B2-2" are set so that "decision effect B2-2" is higher than "1". That is, when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (1st to 3rd big hits, small hits), the "decision effect B2-2" is higher than the case where the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. It is determined.

The "decision effect B2" is the "decision effect B2-1" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A is executed, and the "decision effect B2-2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. It is composed of. Then, in the effect mode B2, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, in the case of a loss, the execution ratio of the "decision effect B2-2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the effect. It is higher than the execution rate of the "decision effect B2-1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 17A is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B2, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B2, the ratio of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

70 and 71 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 63, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the “effect mode F”. FIG. 70A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode F when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 70B shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode F when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the execution ratios (%) of the "development notice F1" and the "development notice F2" as the "development notice F" are set, and the execution ratio (%) is set as the "decision effect F". The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect F1" and "decision effect F2" is set.

Further, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode F. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a “development notice F information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice F” in the effect mode F. FIG. 71B is a diagram showing a “character notice F information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “character notice F” in the effect mode F. FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing a “decision effect F information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “decision effect F” in the effect mode F.

When the variable effect pattern is determined by the variable effect pattern determination table 10 of FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a determines which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 71 is executed in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b). ) Will be determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

The "development notice F1" displays the effect image of the "effect d1" (see (h-3-3) in FIG. 104) on the image display device 13. In this "development notice F1", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X191 described later) for validating the operation for the effect button 17A is set, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A during the operation valid period is set. Is executed. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect d1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect is executed.

The "development notice F2" displays the effect image of the "effect d1" (see (h-3-3) in FIG. 104) on the image display device 13. In this "development notice F2", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X191 described later) that enables the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period is set. Is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect d2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), in "development notice F", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice F1" and "development notice F2" is "development notice F2" and "development notice F2". The execution ratios of "development notice F1" and "development notice F2" are set so as to be higher than "F1".

The "development notice F" is composed of a "development notice F1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A and a "development notice F2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. In the production mode F, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, the ratio of loss is considerably higher than the ratio of big hits, etc., and the loss is lost in the production mode F. In this case, the execution rate of the "development effect F2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of the "development effect F1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is executed. high. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode F, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode F, when the ratio is lower than the loss, such as a big hit, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the effect is produced. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect of urging the operation of the lever 19A.

The "character notice F1" displays the effect image of the "character d1" on the image display device 13. In this "character notice F1", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y101 described later). Not done (see (h-4-1) in FIG. 105). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "Character d1" described later (see (h-4-3) in FIG. 105) is displayed as an image. Corresponding effects such as displaying on the device 13 are executed.

The "character notice F2" has the same effect content as the "character notice F1" except that the effect image of the "character d2" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 13 instead of the "character d1".

The "character notice F3" displays the effect image of the "character d3" on the image display device 13. In this "character notice F3", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y101 described later). Not done (see (h-4-1) in FIG. 105). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "character d3" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), in the "development notice F", the "character notice F1" has the highest expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "character notice F1" to "character notice F3". The execution ratio of "Character notice F1" to "Character notice F3" is set so as to become lower as "Character notice F2" and "Character notice F3" are reached.

"Character notice F" includes "character notice F1" and "character notice F2" that execute an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A, and "character notice F" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is composed of "F3". Then, in the effect mode F, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the "development effect F3" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation for urging the operation of the effect button 17A. It is higher than the execution rate of "Character notice F1" and "Character notice F2" in which promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode F, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode F, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

The "decision effect F1" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash d1" on the image display device 13 (see (h-4-6) in FIG. 105). ). In this "decision effect F1", the effect button 17A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X192 described later), the effect button 17A is selected. The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation is executed, and the state of the effect button 17A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash d1" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is "standby". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from "position 1" to "operation position 1-2" is executed.

The "decision effect F2" moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash d2" on the image display device 13 (see (h-4-6) in FIG. 105). ). In this "decision effect F2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X192 described later), the effect lever 19A is selected. The operation promotion notification that prompts the operation is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "flash d2" is displayed on the image display device 13, and the first decorative member 16A is set to the "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from to "moving position 1-2" is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), in the "decision effect F", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect F1" and the "decision effect F2" is "decision" rather than the "decision effect F2". The execution ratios of the "decision effect F1" and the "decision effect F2" are set so that the "effect F1" is higher. That is, the "decision effect F1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (1st to 3rd big hits, a small hit) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

In the tables of FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), in the case of "decision effect F", in the case of loss, "decision effect F2" is executed at a higher rate than "decision effect F1", so that a big hit or a small hit is executed. In the case of, each execution ratio is set so that the "decision effect F1" is executed at a higher rate than the "decision effect F2".

The "decision effect F" is composed of a "decision effect F1" for executing an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 17A and a "decision effect F2" for executing an operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode F, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the execution ratio of the "decision effect F2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation for urging the operation of the effect button 17A. It is higher than the execution rate of the "decision effect F1" in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode F, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode F, the ratio of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17A than in the effect.

In addition, "development notice" and "decision production" in the production mode B1 (production mode C1, production mode D1, production mode E1), production mode B2 (production mode C2, production mode D2, production mode E2), and production mode F. The expectation of big hits is different for each. That is, the "development notice B1-1"("development notice C1-1", "development notice D1-1", "development notice E1" executed in the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, effect mode D1, effect mode E1). -1 ")," Development notice B2-1 "(" Development notice C2-1 "," Development notice D2-1 "," Development notice B2-1 "executed in the production mode B2 (production mode C2, production mode D2, production mode E2). Among the "development notice E2-1") and the "development notice F1" executed in the production mode F, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of the "development notice F1" is the highest, and the "development notice B2-1" (development notice B2-1) "Development notice C2-1", "Development notice D2-1", "Development notice E2-1"), "Development notice B1-1"("Development notice C1-1", "Development notice D1-1", "Development notice D1-1" Expectations for big hits are getting lower as the development notice E1-1 ”) is reached.
Further, the "decision effect B1-1"("development notice C1-1", "development notice D1-1", "development notice E1" executed in the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, effect mode D1, effect mode E1) -1 ")," decision production B2-1 "(" development notice C2-1 "," development notice D2-1 "," Among the "development notice E2-1") and the "decision effect F1" executed in the effect mode F, the jackpot expectation (reliability) of the "decision effect F1" is the highest, and the "decision effect B2-1" (decision effect B2-1). "Development notice C2-1", "Development notice D2-1", "Development notice E2-1"), "Decision production B1-1"("Development notice C1-1", "Development notice D1-1", "Development notice D1-1" Expectations for big hits are getting lower as the development notice E1-1 ”) is reached.
Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, effect mode D1, effect mode E1), effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, effect mode D2, effect mode E2), effect mode F It can be said that the expectation of a big hit by the production using the production button 17A increases as the process progresses.

As a special effect in the figure variation effect, the sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (effect button 17A or effect lever 19A) during the operation valid period during which the operation on the operation means (effect button 17A or effect lever 19A) is valid. The corresponding effect is executed based on.

The sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than an earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and a later period (first period) in the specific gaming state. In the second period after the period of 1), the operation valid period is set during the variation effect.

That is, the variation effect of the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, effect mode D2, effect mode E2) is higher than the variation effect (first to 30th variation) of the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, effect mode D1, effect mode E1). (31st to 74th fluctuations) sets the operation validity period during the fluctuation effect at a higher rate. In addition, the variable effect of the effect mode F (75th to 84th variation) is more effective during the variable effect than the variable effect of the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, effect mode D2, effect mode E2). Set the period.

Further, the sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period in the specific gaming state. In (the second period after the first period), the operation valid period in which the effect button 17A as the operation means for validating the operation is set to the protruding state, which is the second state, is set.

Further, in the case of the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect using the operation of the effect button 17A at a higher rate than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher expectation of big hit than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 17A. .. On the other hand, in the case of a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state), a higher proportion of special effects using the operation of the effect lever 19A than the special effects using the operation of the effect button 17A. Run with. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the special effect using the operation of the effect button 17A has a higher expectation of big hit than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variable effect pattern determination process by effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 37.

In step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1313-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the storage status of the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

This VS reach is a type of reach that can be executed only in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D, and any VS reach is executed in the variable effect when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit. If it is determined to be performed, the VS reach type determined in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c in step S1313-41 described later is stored.

In step S1313-4, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the variation effect pattern. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the variation effect pattern in the random number storage area for determining the variation effect pattern of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1313-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode A. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-6, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-7.

In step S1313-6, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 1 (FIG. 54) for the effect mode A.

In step S1313-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode B1. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the effect mode B1, it shifts the process to step S1313-8, and when it determines that it is not in the effect mode B1, it shifts the process to step S1313-9.

In step S1313-8, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 2 (FIG. 55) for the effect mode B1.

In step S1313-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode C1. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C1 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-10, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C1 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-11.

In step S1313-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 3 (FIG. 56) for the effect mode C1.

In step S1313-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode D1. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D1 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-12, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D1 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-13.

In step S1313-12, the sub CPU 102a selects the variation effect pattern determination table 4 (FIG. 57) for the effect mode D1.

In step S1313-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode E1. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E1 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-14, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E1 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-15.

In step S1313-14, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 5 (FIG. 58) for the effect mode E1.

In step S1313-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode B2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that it is in the effect mode B2, it shifts the process to step S1313-16, and when it determines that it is not in the effect mode B2, it shifts the process to step S1313-17.

In step S1313-16, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 6 (FIG. 59) for the effect mode B2.

In step S1313-17, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode C2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C2 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-18, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C2 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-19.

In step S1313-18, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 7 (FIG. 60) for the effect mode C2.

In step S1313-19, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode D2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D2 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-20, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D2 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-21.

In step S1313-20, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 8 (FIG. 61) for the effect mode D2.

In step S1313-21, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode E2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E2 is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-22, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E2 is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-23.

In step S1313-22, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 9 (FIG. 62) for the effect mode E2.

In step S1313-23, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode F. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode F is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-24, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode F is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-25.

In step S1313-24, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 10 (FIG. 63) for the effect mode F.

In step S1313-25, the sub CPU 102a selects the variable effect pattern determination table 11 (not shown) for the effect mode G.

In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of variation effect patterns are stored in association with the random number determination value ratio for each special figure variation pattern designation command in each effect mode. The variable effect pattern is identification information representing the effect content of the variable effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variable effect.

As described above, using FIGS. 54 to 63, the variation effect pattern determination table 2, the variation effect pattern determination table 3, the variation effect pattern determination table 4, the variation effect pattern determination table 6, and the variation effect pattern determination table 7 are used. And when the variation effect pattern determination table 8 is selected, the determination patterns (determination patterns 1 to 7) in which the random number determination value ratios are different depending on the storage status of the VS reach confirmed in step S1313-3 described above. Select further.

The variable effect pattern is associated with the components of the variable effect such as the time of the variable effect, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In the variable effect pattern of the variable effect in the image display device 13, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbol and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also components of the variable effect. It is associated.

In step S1313-26, the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern. Specifically, the random number for determining the variation effect pattern stored in the random number storage area for determining the variation effect pattern in step S1313-4 is stored in the random number storage area for determining the variation effect pattern in step S1313-6, step S1313-8, step S1313-10, and step S1313-12. The variation effect pattern is collated with the variation effect pattern determination table selected in step S1313-14, step S1313-16, step S1313-18, step S1313-20, step S1313-22, step S1313-24 or step S1313-25. The variation effect pattern is determined according to the random number determination value ratio set in the determination table.

In step S1313-27, the sub CPU 102a provides information to the effect that the special effect associated with the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-26 is executed (〇) or not executed (×) (FIGS. 54 to 54). By confirming (see FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect in the variable effect of the determined variable effect pattern. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the special effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1313-28, and when it is determined that the special effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313-31.

In step S1313-28, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-26. For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern A-031" in step S1313-26, in this step S1313-28, "line notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" are used as special effects. Is executed, and it is confirmed that the "decision effect A" is not executed (see FIG. 54).

In step S1313-29, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of special effect confirmed in step S1313-28 by lottery.

In step S1313-30, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of the special effect of step S1313-29 has been completed for all the special effects confirmed in step S1313-28, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process is transferred to step S1313-31, and if it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process is returned to step S1313-29.

For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern A-031" in step S1313-26, the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A of FIG. 64 (b) in step S1313-29. Then, one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" is determined as the type of "line notice A", and any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A5" is decided as the type of "character notice A". Is determined, and one of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is determined as the type of "development notice A".

In step S1313-31, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by using the vibration of the effect button 17A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 72 to 73, and determines whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the random value for the specific effect determination. judge. In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not performed when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is the normal reach effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H04H", it is determined that the specific effect is executed (◯) at a rate of 50%, and it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (×) at a rate of 50%. When the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H0BH", it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 80% (◯), and that the specific effect is not executed (×) at a rate of 20%.

In step S1313-32, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not it is determined in step S1313-31 that the specific effect is executed (◯). Then, if it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (◯), the process is transferred to step S1313-33, and if it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (×), the process is transferred to step S1313-34.

In step S1313-33, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any one or a combination of the vibration of the effect button 17A, the output of a pseudo sound of the sound that the effect button 17A vibrates, and the display of the image that the effect button 17A vibrates. Further, the vibration of the effect button 17A is performed by one of two types, low-speed vibration and high-speed vibration.

(Specific production type determination processing by the production control board)
The specific effect type determination process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 38.

First, in step S1313-333-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 17A in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 75, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the vibration speed determination random value to set the vibration speed to "low speed". "" And "high speed" are decided. As shown in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the effect button 17A can vibrate. The "high speed" is a vibration speed at which the vibration is transmitted to the player as "pocopocopocopoco" when the player touches the effect button 17A while the effect button 17A is vibrating. On the other hand, "low speed" means, as described above, when the player touches the effect button 17A while the effect button 17A is vibrating, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "poco ... poco ...". Vibration speed.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H04H", it is determined to be "high speed" at a rate of 50% and "low speed" at a rate of 50%. When the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E7H57H", it is determined to be "high speed" at a rate of 90% and "low speed" at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of the vibration speed of the effect button 17A being determined to be "high speed" rather than "low speed" is higher than in the case of loss. Further, the more the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is the effect with a higher expectation of big hit, the more the vibration speed of the effect button 17A is determined to be "high speed" rather than "low speed". The ratio is getting higher. Therefore, when executing a specific effect, the effect with a higher expectation of a big hit is obtained when the vibration speed of the effect button 17A is "high speed" than when it is "low speed". If it is determined to be "high speed" in this step, the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed when the specific effect is executed, and if it is determined to be "low speed", the effect button 17A is vibrated at low speed when the specific effect is executed. ..

In step S1313-33-2, the sub CPU 102a executes an audio output determination process for determining whether or not to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect voice output determination table shown in FIGS. 76 to 77, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the voice output determination random value to determine the presence or absence of voice output. decide. The sound output is to output the sound such as "pocopocopocopoco" or "poco ... poco ..." which is the vibration sound of the effect button 17A from the audio output device 14 during the execution of the specific effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E6H04H", it is decided to execute audio output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute audio output at a rate of 50% (×). do. When the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H57H", it is decided to execute audio output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute audio output at a rate of 10% (×). do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the voice output (○) is higher than in the case of the loss. Further, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command has a higher expectation of a big hit, the ratio of executing audio output (○) increases. Therefore, when executing a specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect of not outputting the sound.

In step S1313-33-3, the sub CPU 102a executes an image output determination process for determining whether or not to output simulated image data of the effect button 17A that vibrates in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination table shown in FIGS. 78 to 79, and determines whether or not to output an image by using the received special figure fluctuation pattern specification command and the random value for image output determination. do. The output of the image means that the image display device 13 displays an image simulating how the effect button 17A is vibrating during the execution of the specific effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E6H04H", it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute image output at a rate of 50% (×). do. When the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H57H", it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute image output at a rate of 10% (×). do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the image output (◯) is higher than in the case of the loss. Further, as the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command has a higher expectation of a big hit, the ratio of executing the image output (◯) becomes higher. Therefore, when a specific effect is executed, the effect of outputting a pseudo image of the vibrating effect button 17A has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect of not outputting the image.

In this way, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode in the specific effect by executing the processes of steps S1313-33-1 to S1313-33-3. The vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A, and the display of the image of the vibrating effect button 17A are each determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. That is, whether the effect button 17A vibrates at "high speed" or "low speed" in the specific effect, whether the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A, or whether the image display device 13 is produced. Whether or not an image showing the button 17A is displayed suggests a jackpot expectation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80, the jackpot expectation degree is gradually increased by the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 17A, and the display of the image of the effect button 17A. It is different.

Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation of the specific effect shown in FIG. 80, the effect button 17A vibrates at "high speed" in the specific effect, and a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A is output, and further. When the image of the effect button 17A is displayed, the effect suggests the highest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, if the effect button 17A only vibrates at a "low speed" and the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A or the image of the effect button 17A is not output, the specific effect of the lowest jackpot expectation is obtained.

In the present embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, as shown in the specific effect type determination process of FIG. 38, the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A, and the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A. And whether or not to output the image of the vibrating effect button 17A is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 80, a combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 17A, and the presence / absence of the output of the image of the vibrating effect button 17A is set in advance. , Which combination of specific effects may be determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Further, a combination of specific effects may be associated with each variation effect pattern and set.

When the specific effect type determination process is completed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313-34.

In step S1313-34, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode A or the effect mode G. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313-36, and determines that the sub CPU 102a is not the effect mode A or the effect mode G, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to the step S1313-35.

In step S1313-35, the sub CPU 102a performs a telop notice effect determination process related to the telop notice effect that can be executed in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, the effect mode E, and the effect mode F. The telop notice effect is to notify the possibility of executing a jackpot game by displaying a telop effect image in which any of a plurality of characters having different expectations for a jackpot is displayed on the image display device 13, and the jackpot is hit. It is a notice production that gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result is a big hit.

(Telop notice effect judgment processing by the effect control board)
The telop notice effect determination process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S1313-35-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the telop notice pattern. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the telop advance notice pattern determination random number in the telop advance notice pattern determination random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1313-35-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode B. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode B is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-3, and when it is determined that the sub CPU 102a is not the effect mode B, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-4.

In step S1313-35-3, the sub CPU 102a selects the telop notice pattern determination table 1 (FIG. 81) for the effect mode B.

In step S1313-35-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode C. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-5, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-6.

In step S1313-35-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the telop notice pattern determination table 2 (FIG. 82) for the effect mode C.

In step S1313-35-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode D. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-7, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-8.

In step S1313-35-7, the sub CPU 102a selects the telop notice pattern determination table 3 (FIG. 83) for the effect mode D.

In step S1313-35-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1313-1 is the effect mode E. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-9, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is not set, the process is transferred to step S1313-35-10.

In step S1313-35-9, the sub CPU 102a selects the telop notice pattern determination table 4 (FIG. 84) for the effect mode E.

In step S1313-35-10, the sub CPU 102a selects the telop notice pattern determination table 5 (FIG. 85) for the effect mode F.

The telop notice pattern determination tables 1 to 5 are stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85.

In step S1313-35-11, the sub CPU 102a determines the telop notice pattern. Specifically, the telop advance notice pattern determination random number stored in the telop advance notice pattern determination random number storage area in the above step S1313-35-1 is stored in the above step S1313-35-3, step S1313-35-5, and step S1313-35. -7, collates with the telop notice pattern judgment table selected in step S1313-35-9 or step S1313-35-10, and determines the telop notice pattern according to the random number judgment value ratio set in the telop notice pattern judgment table. do.

When the telop notice effect determination process is completed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1313-36.

In step S1313-36, the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect control command corresponding to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-26, the information of the type of special effect determined in step S1313-29, and the information of the type of special effect determined in step S1313-33. The information on the type of the specific effect and the information on the telop notice pattern determined in step S1313-35 are included, and the variable effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1313-37, the sub CPU 102a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1313-38, the effect time of the variation effect is varied. Set the timer counter. The fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to "4" addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the fluctuation effect at the present time by the variation effect timer counter.

The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the variation effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 13 to display the effect image of the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command, and the voice output device of the variation effect. Control the output from 14. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect effect device 16 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 15 in the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command.

Further, the image control board 105 causes the image display device 13 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect control command received from the effect control board 102. The control and the control to output the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 14 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 16 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 15 in the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern indicated by the command. conduct.

In step S1313-39, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the variable effect to be executed from now on is won in the first big hit game based on the variable effect data stored in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c. judge. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the first big hit game has been won, the process shifts to step S1313-40, and when it is determined that the first big hit game has not been won, the sub CPU 102a ends the variable effect pattern determination process.

In step S1313-40, the sub CPU 102a has "VS reach" (VS reach B-1, VS) in the variable effect to be executed from now on based on the variable effect data stored in the variable effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Reach B-2, VS Reach B-3, VS Reach C-1, VS Reach C-2, VS Reach C-3, VS Reach D-1, VS Reach D-2, VS Reach D-3) are executed. Judge whether or not. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the "VS reach" is executed, the process shifts to step S1313-41, and when it is determined that the "VS reach" is not executed, the sub CPU 102a ends the variation effect pattern determination process.

In step S1313-41, the sub CPU 102a stores the type of "VS reach" to be executed in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c.
The VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c is cleared when the power is cut off (power is turned off), but it may not be cleared.

(Telop notice pattern judgment table)
81 to 85 are diagrams showing a telop notice pattern determination table referred to (selected) when determining the final mode.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a telop notice pattern determination table 1 that is referred to (selected) when the effect mode B is set.
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a telop notice pattern determination table 2 referenced (selected) when the effect mode C is set.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a telop notice pattern determination table 3 referenced (selected) when the effect mode D is set.
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a telop notice pattern determination table 4 referenced (selected) when the effect mode E is set.
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a telop notice pattern determination table 5 referenced (selected) when the effect mode F is set.

In the telop advance notice pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 81 to 85, a special symbol determination result, a variation effect pattern, and a random number determination value based on a telop advance notice effect determination random value (0 to 99) for determining the telop advance notice effect are used. The ratio, the telop notice pattern determined according to the telop notice effect determination random value, and the telop notice content based on the telop notice pattern are associated, and the telop notice effect determination random value (0 to 99) is , It is allocated so as to be the random number determination value ratio shown in FIGS. 81 to 85.

In the telop notice pattern, only the telop notice pattern 1 that does not execute the telop notice effect, the telop frame that is the telop notice pattern 2 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and the telop notice pattern 2 are displayed. In the telop frame which is the telop notice pattern 3 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher, "..." is displayed, and in the telop notice pattern 4 which suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the telop notice pattern 3. One that displays "Chance ?!" in a certain telop frame, and one that displays "Chance!" In the telop frame that is the telop notice pattern 5 that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the telop notice pattern 4. , "It's hot!" Is displayed in the telop frame, which is the telop notice pattern 6, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the telop notice pattern 5, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the telop notice pattern 6. "Congratulations !!!!" is displayed in the telop frame, which is the telop notice pattern 7, and "Congratulations!" There are eight types of things that are displayed.
That is, as the jackpot expectation of the telop notice patterns 1 to 8, the telop notice pattern 1 <telop notice pattern 2 <telop notice pattern 3 <telop notice pattern 4 <telop notice pattern 5 <telop notice pattern 6 <telop notice pattern 7 < The numbers increase in the order of telop notice pattern 8 (big hit confirmed).
In addition, the telop notice pattern 8 (“Congratulations !!!”) is a special effect (so-called premium effect) in which the random number judgment value ratio is set extremely low compared to other modes (telop notice patterns 1 to 7). be.

The telop notice patterns 1 to 4 are assigned random number judgment value ratios so that they can be selected regardless of whether the special symbol judgment result has no reach or has reach, but the telop notice patterns 5 to 8 are assigned. Is assigned a random number determination value ratio so that it is selected only when the special symbol determination result has reach. That is, the telop notice patterns 5 to 8 are reach confirmation effects that notify that the reach is to be performed. Further, the telop notice pattern 8 is a big hit confirmation effect because the random number determination value ratio is assigned so that it is selected only when the special symbol determination result is the first big hit or the second big hit.

The telop advance notice pattern determination table 2 shown in FIG. 82 is compared with other telop advance notice pattern determination tables (telop advance notice pattern determination table 1, telop advance notice pattern determination table 3, telop advance notice pattern determination table 4, telop advance notice pattern determination table 5). Therefore, a random number determination value ratio is assigned so that the telop notice patterns 5 to 7 can be easily selected. That is, the effect mode C is easier to execute (select) the reach confirmation effect than the other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode D, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). ing.

The telop notice pattern determination table 2 makes it easier to select telop notice patterns 5 to 7 (reach confirmation effect) than other telop notice pattern determination tables (telop notice pattern determination tables 1, 3 to 5). It suffices if a random number judgment value ratio is assigned, and the random number judgment value ratio of the telop notice patterns 5 to 7 (reach confirmation effect) of other telop notice pattern judgment tables (telop notice pattern judgment tables 1, 3 to 5) is telop. The ratio may be different for each advance notice pattern determination table (telop advance notice pattern determination table 1, 3 to 5), or the same ratio may be used.

The telop advance notice pattern determination table 3 shown in FIG. 83 is compared with other telop advance notice pattern determination tables (telop advance notice pattern determination table 1, telop advance notice pattern determination table 2, telop advance notice pattern determination table 4, telop advance notice pattern determination table 5). Therefore, a random number determination value ratio is assigned so that the telop notice pattern 8 can be easily selected. That is, in the effect mode D, a special effect (so-called premium effect) is executed (selected) as compared with other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). ) Is easy to do.

The telop notice pattern determination table 3 selects the telop notice pattern 8 (special effect (so-called premium effect)) as compared with other telop notice pattern determination tables (telop notice pattern determination tables 1, 2, 4, 5). It suffices if a random number judgment value ratio is assigned so that it can be easily performed, and the telop notice pattern 8 (special effect (so-called premium effect) of another telop notice pattern judgment table (telop notice pattern judgment table 1, 2, 4, 5) ) May be different for each telop notice pattern judgment table (telop notice pattern judgment table 1, 2, 4, 5), or may be the same ratio.

(Transition destination effect mode setting process by effect control board)
Next, the transition destination effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S1316-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect symbol designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. .. When the sub CPU 102a confirms that there is a loss, the process moves to step S1316-3, and when it is confirmed that the sub CPU 102a is not a loss, the sub CPU 102a ends the transition destination effect mode setting process.

In step S1316-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is currently in the effect mode A, it ends the transition destination effect mode setting process, and if it determines that it is not currently in the effect mode A, it shifts the process to step S1316-4.

In step S1316-4, the counter value of the effect mode remaining count counter is subtracted by "1" to update the effect mode remaining count (M), and in step 1316-5, the counter value of the effect mode remaining count counter is "0". It is determined whether or not it is. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the effect mode remaining number (M) is "0", the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316-6 and determines that the counter value is not "0". Then, the transition destination effect mode setting process is terminated.

In step S1316-6, the effect mode flag of the “transition destination effect mode” shown in FIG. 46 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of the transition destination effect mode), and the effect mode setting process is terminated.

For example, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode B1 in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1316-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1316-5), in step S1316-6, the effect mode B2 is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode B1.

Further, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode C1 in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1316-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1316-5), in step S1316-6, the effect mode C2 is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode C1.

Further, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode D1 in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1316-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1316-5), in step S1316-6, the effect mode D2 is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode D1.

Further, the sub CPU 102a is in a state where the effect mode is set to the effect mode E1 in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1316-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1316-5), in step S1316-6, the effect mode E2 is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode E1.

Further, when the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, or the effect mode E2, and it is determined in step S1316-5 that M = 0, (in S1316-5). YES), in step S1316-6, the effect mode F is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode B2, the effect mode C2, the effect mode D2, and the effect mode E2.

If the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode F and determines that M = 0 in step S1316-5 (YES in S1316-5), the effect mode F is set in step S1316-6. The effect mode A is set as the later effect mode (transition destination effect mode).

Further, when the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode G after the third big hit game or the small hit game and it is determined in step S1316-5 that M = 0, (YES in S1316-5). ), In step S1316-6, the effect mode A is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode G.

In the present embodiment, as shown in the transition destination effect mode setting table of FIG. 46, the effect mode B1 and the effect mode set in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game. C1, effect mode D1 or effect mode E1 is set when the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 30 times, and if the number of special figure fluctuations is 31 to 74 times, effect mode B2, effect mode C2, effect mode D2 or The effect mode E2 is set, and if the number of special figure fluctuations is 75 to 84 times, the effect mode F is set.

In step S1316-7, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode set in step S1316-6 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command. The effect content is preset in each effect mode, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image display displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 and the BGM output from the audio output device 14 It is executed as a basic effect by the output and effect mode.

In step S1316-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the transition destination effect mode set in step S1316-6 described above is the effect mode A. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the transition destination effect mode is the effect mode A, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316-9, and when determines that the transfer destination effect mode is not the effect mode A, the sub CPU 102a ends the transition destination effect mode setting process. do.

In step S1316-9, the sub CPU 102a clears the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

The sub CPU 102a determines the variable effect pattern based on the variable effect pattern determination table according to the effect mode set in this way.

The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“line notice”, “character notice”, “development notice”, “decision effect”) among the variation effect patterns shown in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 54 to 63 above. A special effect pattern associated with the information of (0) and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect based on the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 72 to 73 is determined, and the special effect pattern associated with the determined variation effect pattern is determined. As the type of effect, the type of special effect associated with the operation validity period shown in FIGS. 65, 67, 69, and 71, and the type of specific effect are determined by referring to the tables of FIGS. 74 to 79. When this is done, the operation validity period is set in the variable effect.

As can be seen from the execution ratio (ratio of ○) of the special effect of FIGS. 54 to 63 and FIGS. 64, 66, 68, and 70, the sub CPU 102a has a “effect mode” of a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. The operation valid period to be executed in "A" is executed in "effect mode B" to "effect mode F" in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state at a ratio higher than the ratio for determining the type of the associated special effect. Determines the type of special effect associated with the operation validity period. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher probability than the ratio during which the operation is valid in the variable effect of the "effect mode A" in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and the "effect mode" in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. The operation validity period is set in the variable effect of "B" to "effect mode F".

Then, as can be seen from the execution ratio (ratio of ○) of the special effect of FIGS. 55 to 63 and FIGS. 66, 68, and 70, the sub CPU 102a is used after the first jackpot game is completed and the second jackpot game. Of the "production mode B" to "production mode F" of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of, "production mode B1" ("production mode C1"). -"Production mode E1"), "Production mode B2" ("Production mode C2"-"Production mode E2"), and "Production mode F", the higher the percentage, the type of special production to be executed in that production mode. To determine the type of special effect associated with the operation validity period. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the “effect mode B” to the “effect mode F” than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of changes in the special figure is smaller, and the number of changes in the special figure is larger. In (second period), the operation valid period is set during the variable effect. Here, of the "directing mode B" to "directing mode F", "directing mode B1" ("directing mode C1" to "directing mode E1") and "directing mode B2" ("directing mode C2" to "directing" As the mode E2) and the effect mode F are set, the operation validity period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (second state) is associated with the type of the special effect to be executed in that mode at a higher rate. Determine the type of special production. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the “effect mode B” to the “effect mode F” than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of changes in the special figure is smaller, and the number of changes in the special figure is larger. In the (second period), the operation valid period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) during the variation effect is set.

(Special game production pattern determination processing by the production control board)
The special game effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S1318-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special game opening designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1318-2, the storage status of the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c is confirmed, and in step S1318-3, a VS reach storage display command corresponding to the confirmed storage status of the VS reach is generated. do.

In step S1318-4, the sub CPU 102a sets the VS reach storage display command generated in step S1318-3 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The VS reach storage display command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the VS reach storage display command, the image control board 105 displays the VS reach storage status on the image display device 13 so that it can recognize which VS reach is stored based on the VS reach storage display command. indicate.

In step S1318-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special game this time is a first big hit or a second big hit. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, it shifts the process to step S1318-6, and if it determines that it is not the first jackpot or the second jackpot, it shifts the process to step S1318-7.

In step S1318-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all VS reach is stored in the VS reach storage area confirmed in step S1318-2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that all VS reach is stored, the process is transferred to step S1318-19, and when it is determined that all VS reach is not stored, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318-7.

In step S1318-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1318-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1318-7 is the effect mode A or the effect mode G. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318-9, and determines that the sub CPU 102a is not the effect mode A or the effect mode G, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318-10.

In step S1318-9, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 1 (FIG. 86 (a)) for the effect mode A or the effect mode G.

In step S1318-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1318-7 is the effect mode B. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode B is set, the process is transferred to step S1318-11, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode B is not set, the process is transferred to step S1318-12.

In step S1318-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 2 (FIG. 86 (b)) for the effect mode B.

In step S1318-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1318-7 is the effect mode C. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is set, the process is transferred to step S1318-13, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is not set, the process is transferred to step S1318-14.

In step S1318-13, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 3 (FIG. 86 (c)) for the effect mode C.

In step S1318-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1318-7 is the effect mode D. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is set, the process is transferred to step S1318-15, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is not set, the process is transferred to step S1318-16.

In step S1318-15, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 4 (FIG. 86 (d)) for the effect mode D.

In step S1318-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1318-7 is the effect mode E. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is set, the process is transferred to step S1318-17, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is not set, the process is transferred to step S1318-18.

In step S1318-17, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 5 (FIG. 86 (e)) for the effect mode E.

In step S1318-18, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 6 (FIG. 86 (f)) for the effect mode F.

In step S1318-19, the sub CPU 102a selects the special game effect pattern determination table 7 (FIG. 86 (g)) when all VS reach is stored.

The special game effect pattern determination tables 1 to 7 are stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (g).

In step S1318-20, the sub CPU 102a determines a special game effect pattern. Specifically, the storage status of the VS reach confirmed in step S1318-2 and the steps S1318-9, step S1318-11, step S1318-13, step S1318-15, step S1318-17, step S1318-18 or The special game effect pattern is determined according to the special game effect pattern determination table selected in step S1318-19.

In step S1318-21, the sub CPU 102a sets the special game effect control command corresponding to the special game effect pattern determined in step S1318-110 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1318-22, the sub CPU 102a sets the special game effect data corresponding to the determined special game effect pattern in the special game effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1318-23, the effect of the special game effect. Set the time to the special game effect timer counter. The special game effect timer counter is subjected to "4" addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the special game effect at the present time by the special game effect timer counter.

The special game effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the special game effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 13 to display the effect image of the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern indicated by the command, and the voice of the special game effect. Is controlled to be output from the audio output device 14. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the special game effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 16 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 15 in the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern indicated by the command. conduct.

(Special game production pattern determination table)
FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (g) are diagrams showing a special game effect pattern determination table selected (referenced) when determining a special game effect pattern.

FIG. 86A is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 1 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode A or the effect mode G. Is.
FIG. 86B is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 2 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode B.
FIG. 86 (c) is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 3 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode C.
FIG. 86 (d) is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 4 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode D.
FIG. 86 (e) is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 5 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode E.
FIG. 86 (f) is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 6 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode F.
FIG. 86 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C) in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won. -3, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a special game effect pattern determination table 7 selected (referenced) when VS reach D-1 to D-3 are stored.

In the special game effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 86 (g), the special symbol determination result, the special game opening designation command from the main control board 101, and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other. As a reference, the contents of the special game production are described.

The special game effect pattern B-1 shown in FIG. 86 (a) is selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the special game effect 1 for executing the jackpot effect 1 is executed. It is a pattern.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-2 is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the big hit effect 2 is executed.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-3 is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the jackpot effect 3 is executed.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-4 is a special game effect pattern that is selected when a small hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the small hit effect is executed.

The special game effect pattern B-5 and the special game effect pattern B-6 shown in FIG. 86B are special game effect patterns when the first big hit is won when the effect mode B is set. When all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B when one jackpot is won is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, a special game effect is produced. Pattern B-6 is selected and the special jackpot effect 1 is executed. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-5 is selected and the jackpot effect 4 is executed. do.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-7 and the special game effect pattern B-8 are special game effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode B is set, and the second big hit is won. When all the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the special game effect pattern B-8 is set. Select and execute the special jackpot effect 2. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-7 is selected and the jackpot effect 5 is executed. do.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-9 is selected when the third jackpot is won when the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, the effect mode E, and the effect mode F are set, and the jackpot effect is produced. It is a special game production pattern that executes 6.

The special game effect pattern B-10 and the special game effect pattern B-11 shown in FIG. 86 (c) are special game effect patterns when the first big hit is won when the effect mode C is set. When all VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C when one jackpot is won is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, a special game is performed. The effect pattern B-11 is selected, and the special jackpot effect 3 is executed. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-10 is selected and the jackpot effect 7 is executed. do.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-12 and the special game effect pattern B-13 are special game effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode C is set, and the second big hit is won. When all VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the special game effect pattern B-13 is used. Select and execute the special jackpot effect 4. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-12 is selected and the jackpot effect 8 is executed. do.

The special game effect pattern B-14 and the special game effect pattern B-15 shown in FIG. 86 (d) are special game effect patterns when the first big hit is won when the effect mode D is set. When all VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D when one jackpot is won is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, a special game effect is produced. Select pattern B-15 and execute the special jackpot effect 5. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-14 is selected and the jackpot effect 9 is executed. do.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-16 and the special game effect pattern B-17 are special game effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode D is set, and the second big hit is won. When all the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the special game effect pattern B-17 is used. Select and execute the special jackpot effect 6. On the other hand, if all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the special game effect pattern B-16 is selected and the jackpot effect 10 is executed. do.

The special game effect pattern B-18 shown in FIG. 86 (e) is a special game effect pattern selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode E is set, and the jackpot effect 11 is executed.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-19 is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode E is set, and the big hit effect 12 is executed.

The special game effect pattern B-20 shown in FIG. 86 (f) is a special game effect pattern selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode F is set, and the jackpot effect 13 is executed.

Further, the special game effect pattern B-21 is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won while the effect mode F is set, and executes the big hit effect 14.

The special game effect pattern B-22 shown in FIG. 86 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C-3, VS) when the first jackpot is won. This is a special game effect pattern selected when the reach D-1 to D-3) are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the special jackpot effect 7 is executed.

In addition, the special game production pattern B-23 is all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3, D-1 to D-3) when the second big hit is won. Is a special game effect pattern that is selected when is stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c and executes the special jackpot effect 8.

As described above, the contents of the special game effect differ depending on whether or not all the VS reach associated with each effect mode is stored in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. ing.

Further, when all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C-3 and VS reach D-1 to D-3) are memorized, the mode is not limited to the production mode. A special game effect (special jackpot effect 7 to special jackpot effect 8) that is different from the usual one is performed.

(Ending effect pattern determination process by effect control board)
The ending effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

In step S1319-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special game ending designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1319-2, the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Check the memory status.

In step S1319-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special game this time is a first big hit or a second big hit. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, it shifts the process to step S1319-4, and if it determines that it is not the first jackpot or the second jackpot, it shifts the process to step S1319-5.

In step S1319-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not all VS reach is stored in the VS reach storage area confirmed in step S1319-2. When the sub CPU 102a determines that all VS reach is stored, the process is transferred to step S1319-17, and when it is determined that all VS reach is not stored, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1319-5.

In step S1319-5, the sub CPU 102a confirms the effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1319-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1319-5 is the effect mode A or the effect mode G. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1319-7, and determines that the sub CPU 102a is not the effect mode A or the effect mode G, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1319-8.

In step S1319-7, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 1 (FIG. 87 (a)) for the effect mode A or the effect mode G.

In step S1319-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1319-5 is the effect mode B. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode B is set, the process is transferred to step S1319-9, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode B is not set, the process is transferred to step S1319-10.

In step S1319-9, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 2 (FIG. 87 (b)) for the effect mode B.

In step S1319-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1319-5 is the effect mode C. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is set, the process is transferred to step S1319-11, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode C is not set, the process is transferred to step S1319-12.

In step S1319-11, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 3 (FIG. 87 (c)) for the effect mode C.

In step S1319-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1319-5 is the effect mode D. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is set, the process is transferred to step S1319-13, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode D is not set, the process is transferred to step S1319-14.

In step S1319-13, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 4 (FIG. 87 (d)) for the effect mode D.

In step S1319-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode confirmed in step S1319-5 is the effect mode E. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is set, the process is transferred to step S1319-15, and when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode E is not set, the process is transferred to step S1319-16.

In step S1319-15, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 5 (FIG. 87 (e)) for the effect mode E.

In step S1319-16, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 6 (FIG. 87 (f)) for the effect mode F.

In step S1319-17, the sub CPU 102a selects the ending effect pattern determination table 7 (FIG. 87 (g)) when all VS reach is stored.

The ending effect pattern determination tables 1 to 7 are stored in the sub ROM 102b, and the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g).

In step S1319-18, the sub CPU 102a determines the ending effect pattern. Specifically, the storage status of the VS reach confirmed in step S1319-2 and the above steps S1319-7, step S1319-9, step S1319-11, step S1319-13, step S1319-15, step S1319-16 or The ending effect pattern is determined according to the ending effect pattern determination table selected in step S1319-17.

In step S1319-19, the sub CPU 102a sets the ending effect control command corresponding to the ending effect pattern determined in step S1319-18 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1319-20, the sub CPU 102a sets the ending effect data corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the ending effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1319-21, the effect time of the ending effect is set to the ending effect. Set the timer counter. The ending effect timer counter is subjected to "4" addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the ending effect at the present time by the ending effect timer counter.

The ending effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the ending effect control command, the image control board 105 controls to display the effect image of the ending effect based on the ending effect pattern indicated by the command on the image display device 13, and outputs the sound of the ending effect by voice. Control the output from the device 14. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the ending effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 16 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 15 in the ending effect based on the ending effect pattern indicated by the command.

◇ (Ending production pattern determination table)
87 (a) to 87 (g) are diagrams showing the ending effect pattern determination table referred to (selected) when the ending effect pattern is determined.

FIG. 87 (a) is an ending effect pattern determination table 1 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode A or the effect mode G.
FIG. 87 (b) is an ending effect pattern determination table 2 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode B.
FIG. 87 (c) is an ending effect pattern determination table 3 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode C.
FIG. 87 (d) is an ending effect pattern determination table 4 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode D.
FIG. 87 (e) is an ending effect pattern determination table 5 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode E.
FIG. 87 (f) is an ending effect pattern determination table 6 that is selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode F.
FIG. 87 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C) in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won. -3, the ending effect pattern determination table 7 is selected (referenced) when VS reach D-1 to D-3 are stored.

The ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g) corresponds to the special symbol determination result, the special game ending designation command from the main control board 101, the ending effect pattern, and the presence or absence of the operation valid period. Attached, the production content of the ending effect is described as a reference.

First, the ending effect pattern ED-1 shown in FIG. 87 (a) is selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 1 is executed. It is a pattern. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-1, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-2 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 2 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-2, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-3 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the third big hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 3 is executed.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-4 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when a small hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect for the small hit is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-5 and the ending effect pattern ED-6 shown in FIG. 87 (b) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode B is set, and the first jackpot When all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-6 Is selected, and the special ending effect 1 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-5 is selected and the ending effect 4 is executed. .. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-5 and the ending effect pattern ED-6, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-7 and the ending effect pattern ED-8 are ending effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode B is set, and the effect is produced when the second big hit is won. When all the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the mode B are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-8 is selected and special. Execute ending effect 2. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-7 is selected and the ending effect 5 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-7, the operation valid period is not set and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect, but in the ending effect pattern ED-8, the operation valid period is set. , The effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-9 is selected when the third big hit is won when the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, the effect mode E, and the effect mode F are set, and the ending effect 6 is selected. It is an ending effect pattern that executes.

The ending effect pattern ED-10 and the ending effect pattern ED-11 shown in FIG. 87 (c) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode C is set, and the first jackpot is When all the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED- 11 is selected and the special ending effect 3 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-10 is selected and the ending effect 7 is executed. .. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-10 and the ending effect pattern ED-11, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-12 and the ending effect pattern ED-13 are ending effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode C is set, and the effect is produced when the second big hit is won. When all VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the mode C are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-13 is selected and special. The ending effect 4 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-12 is selected and the ending effect 8 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-12, the operation valid period is not set and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect, but in the ending effect pattern ED-13, the operation valid period is set. , The effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

The ending effect pattern ED-14 and the ending effect pattern ED-15 shown in FIG. 87 (d) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode D is set, and the first jackpot When all VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-15 is stored. Is selected, and the special ending effect 5 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-14 is selected and the ending effect 9 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-14 and the ending effect pattern ED-15, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-16 and the ending effect pattern ED-17 are ending effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode D is set, and the effect is produced when the second big hit is won. When all VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the mode D are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-17 is selected and special. The ending effect 6 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-16 is selected and the ending effect 10 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-16, the operation valid period is not set and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect, but in the ending effect pattern ED-17, the operation valid period is set. , The effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

The ending effect pattern ED-18 shown in FIG. 87 (e) is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the first big hit is won when the effect mode E is set, and the ending effect 11 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-18, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-19 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode E is set, and the ending effect 12 is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-20 shown in FIG. 87 (f) is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the first big hit is won when the effect mode F is set, and the ending effect 13 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-20, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-21 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode F is set, and the ending effect 14 is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-22 shown in FIG. 87 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C-3, VS reach) when the first jackpot is won. This is an ending effect pattern that is selected when D-1 to D-3) are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c and executes the special ending effect 7. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-22, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

In addition, the ending effect pattern ED-23 provides all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3, D-1 to D-3) when the second jackpot is won. This is an ending effect pattern that is selected when stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c and executes the special ending effect 8. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-23, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

As described above, the contents of the ending effect differ depending on whether or not all the VS reach associated with each effect mode is stored in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. There is.

Further, when all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C-3, VS reach D-1 to D-3) are memorized, the mode is not limited to the production mode. Different ending effects (special ending effect 7 and special ending effect 8) are performed.

Further, the effect mode selection effect is the first jackpot and the second jackpot (so-called first jackpot) when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, that is, when the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not set. When all VS reach associated with each of the ending effects (ending effects 1 and 2), effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D when the winning) is won is stored. Ending effect when winning the 1st and 2nd jackpots (special ending effects 1 to 6), ending effect when winning the 1st and 2nd jackpots when all VS reach is memorized (special) It is designed to be performed during the ending effects 7 and 8) and the ending effects (ending effects 1, 4, 7, 9, 11 and 13) when the first big hit is won.

(Production input control processing by the production control board)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 in the above-mentioned step S1400 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process shifts to step S1402 and the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that it is not, the process is transferred to step S1407.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a has an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 17a based on the push operation of the effect button 17A, and a selection button operation detection signal from the selection button operation detection switch 18a based on the operation of the selection button 18A. By determining whether or not any of the effect lever operation detection signals from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A is input, it is determined whether or not any of these operations has been performed. When the sub CPU 102a determines that any operation has been performed, the process shifts to step S1403, and when it is determined that no operation has been performed to any of the operating means, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect input control process.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed in response to the variation display of the current special symbol stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid in the variation effect according to the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403. If it is determined that the operation is valid, the process is transferred to step S1405, and if it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a indicates whether or not the activated effect button 17A or effect lever 19A has been operated during the operation valid period determined in step S1404 from the effect button operation detection switch 17a. Judgment is made based on the presence / absence of input of the effect lever operation detection signal from the button operation detection signal or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the activated effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A has been operated, the process is transferred to step S1406, and the activated effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A is operated. If it is determined that there is no such effect, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sends a corresponding effect control command for controlling the corresponding effect based on the operation to the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A for which the operation is enabled to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c during the operation valid period. Set to.

The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, they perform the effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

For example, the sub CPU 102a confirms the "variable effect pattern A-031" as the variable effect pattern in step S1403, and the effect button 17A or the effect button 17A that is activated during the operation valid period of the "line notice A1". When the effect lever 19A is operated, the corresponding effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 and the lamp control board 104. As a result, the image control board 105 controls to display the effect image of "line a1" as a corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1603 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 16C "operates" from the "standby position 3" as the corresponding effect. The movement operation to move to the "position 3" will be performed.

In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification is performed to urge the player to operate the effect button 17A during the execution of the game effect related to the game using the game ball, such as the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol. In the operation enabled state, the effect button 17A is in a non-protruding state (first state) or a protruding state (second state).

In step S1407, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game is on standby for which the game effect related to the game is not performed. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the game is waiting, the process is transferred to step S1408, and when it is determined that the sub CPU 102a is not waiting for the game, the process is transferred to step S1413.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the menu screen is being displayed on the image display device 13. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu screen is being displayed, it shifts the process to step S1409, and when it determines that the menu screen is not being displayed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1411.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button 17A or the selection button 18A has been operated. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button 17A or the selection button 18A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1410, and when it is determined that the effect button 17A or the selection button 18A has not been operated, the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect input control process. To finish.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 102a sets the menu operation effect control command corresponding to the operation of the effect button 17A or the selection button 18A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect button 17A has been operated. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect button 17A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1412, and when it is determined that the effect button 17A has not been operated, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect input control process.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 102a sends a menu screen display control command to the image display device 13 to display a menu screen for causing the player to select and determine various menus that can be set in the gaming machine Y. Set to.

The menu screen display control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500.
Then, when the image control board 105 receives the menu screen display control command, the image control board 105 controls to display the menu screen (see FIG. 44) indicated by the menu screen control command.

Further, the menu screen display control command may be transmitted to the lamp control board 104 by the data output process of step S1500. In this case, when the lamp control board 104 receives the menu screen display control command, the LED controls the LED to light the effect button 17A for which the operation is effective when the menu screen indicated by the menu screen display control command is displayed. Light emission control is performed.

In this step S1412, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation execution flag indicating that the effect button 17A has been operated in step S1411 to ON in the operation execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The sub CPU 102a sets an operation enabled state in which the operation for the selection button 18A is enabled when the operation execution flag is set to ON.

In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation execution flag in the operation execution flag storage area to on when the menu screen is displayed on the image display device 13, and turns off when the menu screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 13. Set to.
As described above, the sub CPU 102a is selected based on the fact that the operation execution flag is set to ON by one pressing operation of the effect button 17A in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. Set the operation enabled state that enables the operation for the button 18A.

◆ In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the effect button 17A during the execution of the game effect related to the game using the game ball, such as the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol. In the operation enabled state, the effect button 17A is set to the non-protruding state (first state) or the protruding state (second state).

On the other hand, in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed, in the operation enabled state, the effect button 17A is set to the non-protruding state (first state), while the protruding state (second state) is restricted. is doing.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a menu screen displayed on the image display device 13 based on the control based on the menu screen control command set in step S1412.

The menu screen shown in FIG. 44 has a text image 510 "Please select a menu" and a menu "Volume setting" as a text image showing a menu selectable by the upper 181A and the lower 183A of the selection button 18A. A character image 511 indicating, a character image 512 indicating a menu "light amount setting", a character image 513 indicating a menu "guide", and a character image 514 indicating a menu "return", which are used for selecting these menus. It has an image 515A of the selection button 18A, a character image 515B of "selection", an image 516A of the effect button 17A used when determining the selected menu, and a character image 516B of "decision".

As shown in FIG. 44, a character image 511 indicating a menu item "volume setting", a character image 512 indicating a menu item "light amount setting", a character image 513 indicating a menu item "guide", and a menu "return". The character images 514 showing the items are arranged and displayed from the upper side to the lower side of the menu screen in this order.

As described above, the menu screen of FIG. 44 is displayed on the image display device 13 by pressing the effect button 17A, and when this menu screen is displayed, the operation for the selection button 18A is effective. Then, each time a pressing operation is performed on the upper portion 181A of the selection button 18A, a menu item displayed on the upper side of the menu screen is selected, and each time a pressing operation is performed on the lower portion 183A of the selection button 18A. , The menu item displayed at the bottom of the menu screen is selected.

The menu screen shown in FIG. 44 is a state in which a menu item of "volume setting" is selected, and is selected in order to make the menu item selected in this way distinguishable from other menu items. It is emphasized by blinking the character image indicating the menu item and adding an effect image.

Then, the selected menu item is determined by pressing the effect button 17A, and then an image of the content of the determined menu item is displayed.

When "volume setting" is determined as a menu item, a volume setting screen (not shown) is displayed in which a volume gauge for adjusting the volume output from the gaming machine Y by the player is displayed.
When "light intensity setting" is determined as a menu item, a light intensity setting screen (not shown) displaying a volume gauge for the player to adjust the light intensity of the LED in the effect lighting device 15 is displayed. ..
When "guide" is determined as a menu item, the explanation of the reach effect executed in the variable effect of the effect modes A to G, the explanation of the characters appearing in the variable effect of the effect modes A to G, and the effect mode A to Various guide screens (not shown) such as an explanation of the reliability for the jackpot in the advance notice effect executed in the variable effect of G are displayed.
When "return" is determined as the menu item, the screen of the image display device 13 returns to the screen before the menu screen is displayed.

In addition, the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 13 when "volume setting" is determined as a menu item, and the light intensity setting screen is displayed on the image display device 13 when "light intensity setting" is determined. In the displayed state, the left portion 182A and the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A can be pressed.

When the volume setting screen is displayed on the image display device 13, the volume can be adjusted by pressing the left portion 182A and the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A. Each time the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is pressed, the volume decreases, and the level of the volume gauge also decreases accordingly. Further, each time the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is pressed, the volume increases, and the level of the volume gauge also increases accordingly.

Further, when the light amount setting screen is displayed on the image display device 13, the light amount can be adjusted by pressing the left portion 182A and the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A. Each time the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is pressed, the amount of light of the LED in the effect lighting device 15 becomes smaller, and the level of the light amount gauge also decreases accordingly. Further, each time the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is pressed, the amount of light of the LED in the effect lighting device 15 increases, and the level of the light amount gauge also increases accordingly.

The operation means for which the operation is effective by pressing the effect button 17A during this standby state is not limited to the above-mentioned selection button 18A, and other operation means may be applied.

For example, the effect lever 19A is installed so that it can be tilted to the front side, the back side, the left side, and the right side, and the effect lever 19A is applied instead of the selection button 18A. Specifically, for example, the tilting operation to the back side of the effect lever 19A corresponds to the pressing operation of the upper portion 181A of the selection button 18A, and the tilting operation to the front side of the effect lever 19A is the pressing operation of the lower portion 183A of the selection button 18A. Corresponding to the operation, the tilting operation to the left side of the effect lever 19A corresponds to the pressing operation of the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A, and the tilting operation to the right side of the effect lever 19A corresponds to the pressing operation of the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A. Equivalent to. The upper portion 181A, the left portion 182A, the lower portion 183A, the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A and the back side, the left side, the front side, and the right side of the effect lever 19A do not have to correspond in this way. For example, the tilting operation to the back side of the effect lever 19A corresponds to the pressing operation of the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A, and the tilting operation to the front side of the effect lever 19A corresponds to the pressing operation of the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A. You may try to do it.

Further, the menu screen displayed on the image display device 13 is not limited to the example of FIG. 44 described above, and for example, "character selection" for allowing the player to select a character to appear during the production from a plurality of characters. , A menu screen having menu items such as "music selection" for allowing the player to select a music to be output during the jackpot game from a plurality of music may be used.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the ending is in progress, the process shifts to step S1414, and when it is determined that the ending is not in progress, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect input control process.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect mode setting process related to the effect mode setting.

(Production mode setting process by the production control board)
The effect mode setting process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S1414-1, the sub CPU 102a has the ending effect patterns ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, ED-8, ED-10, which are currently being performed. It is determined whether or not it is ED-11, ED-13, ED-14, ED-15, ED-17, ED-18, ED-20, ED-22 or ED-23. The sub CPU 102a has ending effect patterns ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, ED-8, ED-10, ED-11, ED-13, ED-14, ED-15, ED-17. , ED-18, ED-20, ED-22 or ED-23, the process is transferred to step S1414-2, and the ending effect patterns ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, If it is determined that it is not ED-8, ED-10, ED-11, ED-13, ED-14, ED-15, ED-17, ED-18, ED-20, ED-22 or ED-23, the step The process is transferred to S1414-9.

In step S1414-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid during the ending effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation is valid, the process shifts to step S1414-3, and if it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process.

In step S1414-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has been operated. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1414-7, and determines that the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has not been operated. , Step S1414-4.

In step S1414-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation valid period in the ending effect has expired. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation valid period has expired, it shifts the process to step S1414-5, and when it determines that the operation valid period has not expired, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process.

In step S1414-5, the sub CPU 102a is set to the currently selected effect mode. Specifically, the selection counter is confirmed, and the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the selection counter is stored in the effect mode flag storage area. For example, if the selection counter = 00, the effect mode B1 is indicated, the effect mode flag “01H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and if the selection counter = 01, the effect mode C1 is indicated. The effect mode flag "02H" is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and if the selection counter = 02, the effect mode D1 is indicated, and the effect mode flag "03H" is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and the selection counter is selected. If = 03, the effect mode E1 is indicated, and the effect mode flag “04H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area.

In step S1414-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode set in step S1414-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command. The effect content is preset in each effect mode, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image display displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 and the BGM output from the audio output device 14 It is executed as a basic effect by the output and effect mode.

In step S1414-7, the sub CPU 102a updates the selection counter. Specifically, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 00, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 00, and the selection counter = 01.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 00, the selection counter = 00 is set to “-1” and the selection counter = 03.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 01, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 01, and the selection counter = 02.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 01, "-1" is performed on the selection counter = 01, and the operation counter = 00.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 02, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 02, and the selection counter = 03.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 02, "-1" is applied to the selection counter = 02, and the selection counter = 01.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 03, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 03, and the selection counter = 00.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 03, "-1" is performed on the selection counter = 03, and the selection counter = 02.

In step S1414-8, the sub CPU 102a sets a selection switching control command indicating that the effect mode indicated by the selection counter updated in step S1414-7 is selected in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The selection switching control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the selection switching control command, the effect images (FIGS. 109 (c), 110 (a), and FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (c) are displayed).

In step S1414-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the ending effect pattern of the ending effect currently being performed is the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4, or ED-9. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4 or ED-9 is present, the process is transferred to step S1414-10, and the sub CPU 102a is not the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4 or ED-9. If it is determined, the effect mode setting process is terminated.

In step S1414-10, the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode G. Specifically, the effect mode flag "05H" indicating the effect mode G is stored in the effect mode flag storage area.

In step S1414-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode set in step S1414-10 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command. The effect content is preset in each effect mode, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image display displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 and the BGM output from the audio output device 14 It is executed as a basic effect by the output and effect mode.

Here, a specific example of the variable effect will be described.

(Specific example of variable production of production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

In FIG. 88A, the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H09H” or “E7H09H” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A-031”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of. Further, FIG. 88B is executed and specified when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A-035”. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the variable effect which executes an effect. Further, in FIG. 88C, the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" from the main control board 101, determines the "variation effect pattern A-039", and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a fluctuation effect.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern A-031 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variable effect pattern A-031" is selected in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a has the timing shown in FIG. 88 (a). The effect control for executing the variable effect from T11 to the timing T14 is performed. 89 to 91 show an effect image displayed on the image display device 13 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 88 (a), an effect button 17A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 16B, and a third decorative member 16C. ing.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, executes "normal reach 1" in the period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13, and then executes "normal reach 1". , In the period (a-3) and the period (a-4) from the timing T13 to the timing T14, the effect control for executing the "super reach 1" is performed.

In the "symbol variation" in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for displaying the effect image in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed on the image display device 13.

In the "symbol variation" in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes a plurality of special effect symbols and a predetermined character "character a1 (Kunoichi)" appears in (a-) of FIG. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in 1-1) on the image display device 13 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "line notice A" as a special effect in this "design variation". "Serif notice A" is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing a big hit game and gives a feeling of expectation that the big hit determination result is a big hit.

Further, the variable icon TH is displayed in green (special mode 2) in the variable icon display area 70D, and the variable icon TH displayed in green (special mode 2) reaches in the variable effect. Is informed that will be done. Further, nothing is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, indicating that neither the first hold nor the second hold is stored.

The sub CPU 102a is set as "line notice A" in FIG. 65 (a) according to the execution ratio of "line notice A" in the "variation effect pattern A-031" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). ), The effect control for executing any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in "design variation", the operation of the effect button 17A is enabled as shown in FIG. 88 (a). The operation valid period X11 is set (see FIG. 65 (a)).

In the case of the "line notice A2" or the "line notice A3", the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A in the operation valid period X11 (a-1-2). The effect of displaying the effect image shown in the above on the image display device 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge. Further, in the case of the "speech notice A1", the effect of displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 89 including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 13 is executed. do. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

The sub CPU 102a has a "line notice" as shown in the execution ratios of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in the "variable effect pattern A-031" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). During the operation validity period X11 of "A1" to "line notice A3", the state of the effect button 17A is left in the non-protruding state (first state) and not in the protruding state (second state). .. It should be noted that the corresponding voice may be output from the voice output device 14 while displaying the effect image of the operation promotion notification.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A1", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a1" ("one thousand dollars") based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X11. The effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 89 is displayed on the image display device 13, and the third decorative member 16C is "operated" from the "standby position 3" as a movable member. Corresponding effect (notice effect) such as moving to "position 3" is executed. The sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the voice of the "line a1" from the voice output device 14.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A2", as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the production image shown in (a-1-4) of 89, the image display device 13 displays a production image in which "character a1" speaks "line a2" ("Hundred cars acquired?"). Controls the effect for executing the effect (notice effect).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A3", as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the production image shown in (a-1-4) of 89, the corresponding production (corresponding effect) in which the production image in which "character a1" speaks "line a3" ("10 cars acquired?") Is displayed on the image display device 13. The effect control for executing the advance notice effect) is performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5", the operation valid period X11 is not set. That is, in the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5", the operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in FIGS. 89 (a-1-2) and (a-1-3) is not displayed. , The advance notice effect of displaying the effect image of the "character a1" speaking the dialogue on the image display device 13 at a predetermined timing is executed. It should be noted that the advance notice effects of the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5" are the effects corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding effects.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A4", as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the sub CPU 102a is different from the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. Performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image of a state in which "" speaks "line a4" ("Is it one car acquired?") On the image display device 13.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A5", as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the sub CPU 102a is different from the effect image shown in FIG. 89 (a-1-4), and the "character a1" is executed at a predetermined timing. Performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image of the appearance of "Speaking" dialogue a5 "(" earning money? ") On the image display device 13.

In the "normal reach 1" in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 13. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of FIG. 90 (a-2-1) that generates the state on the image display device 13 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "character notice A" as a special effect in this "normal reach 1". Like the "line notice A", the "character notice A" is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing the big hit game and gives a feeling of expectation that the big hit determination result is a big hit.

The sub CPU 102a uses the "character notice A1" as the "character notice A" according to the execution ratio of the "character notice A" in the "variable effect pattern A-031" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). -Perform effect control to execute any of "Character Notice A5".

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 88 (a). The operation validity period Y11 is set (see FIG. 65 (b)).

The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A during the operation valid period Y11. That is, during the operation validity period Y11, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 13 to display the effect image shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) of FIG. 90, which does not include the image of the operation promotion notification. Take control.

The sub CPU 102a has a "character notice" as shown in the execution ratios of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" in the "variable effect pattern A-031" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). During the operation valid period Y11 of "A1" to "Character notice A3", the state of the effect button 17A is left in the non-protruding state (first state) so as not to be in the protruding state.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period Y11, as shown in FIG. 90 (a-2-4). , An effect for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect) such that a new character "Character a2-1" is additionally displayed in addition to the already displayed "Character a1" in the image display device 13. Take control.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A2", as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the device 13, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) of the content such as additionally displaying the "character a2-2" different from the "character a2-1" is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A3", as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the device 13, the effect control for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect) of the content such as additionally displaying the "character a2-3" different from the "character a2-1" and the "character a2-2" is performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5", the operation valid period Y11 is not set. That is, in the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5", the effect control for executing the advance notice effect in which a new character is additionally displayed is performed at a predetermined timing. The notice effects of the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5" are the effects corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding effects.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A4", as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which the "character a2-4" (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. Controls the effect for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A5", as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which the "character a2-5" (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing. Controls the effect for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect).

After that, when the sub CPU 102a shifts from the normal reach to the super reach (from FIG. 90 (a-2-4) to FIG. 91 (a-3-1)), the sub CPU 102a displays a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown). After performing, only the numbers from the character image and the numbers that were displayed up to that point are the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are stopped and displayed in the reach state. In order to execute an effect of displaying the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG. 91 in which the "character a3 (A child)" appears on the image display device 13 while changing the display to the simple display displayed in. Perform production control.

Further, since the game ball has entered the start port, the sub CPU 102a determines the hold mode to be white (normal mode) in the look-ahead effect determination process in step S1306, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. A white (normal mode) hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1.

When the hold mode is determined to be blue (special mode 1) in the look-ahead effect determination process of step S1306, the sub CPU 102a is blue (special mode 1) on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. When the hold icon H11 is displayed and the hold mode is determined to be green (special mode 2), the hold icon H11 in green (special mode 2) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. When the hold icon H11 is determined to be red (special mode 3), the hold icon H11 in red (special mode 3) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. When the hold mode is determined to be gold (special mode 4), the hold icon H11 in gold (special mode 4) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold mode is rainbow. When the color (special aspect 5) is determined, the rainbow-colored (special aspect 5) hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4.
When the hold mode is green (special mode 2), red (special mode 3), gold (special mode 4), and rainbow color (special mode 5), the reach effect is produced in the variable effect corresponding to this hold. It is a reach confirmation production that informs that the event will be performed. Further, when the hold mode is rainbow color (special mode 5), it is notified that the variable effect corresponding to this hold is a big hit.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in this “super reach 1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1313-33. When executing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 107 (b) in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but is not limited to this, for example, the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4). The specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

Further, in this "Super Reach 1", the sub CPU 102a gives a "development notice A" as a special effect to fuel the development to "Special Reach 1", which is a production with higher reliability for big hits than "Super Reach 1". Execute. Like "Speech Notice A" and "Character Notice A", "Development Notice A" is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a big hit game and gives a feeling of expectation that the big hit judgment result is a big hit. be.

The sub CPU 102a is set as "development notice A1" as "development notice A" according to the execution ratio of "development notice A" in "variation effect pattern A-031" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). -The production control for executing any one of "development notice A6" is performed.

The sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X12 that enables the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A regardless of which of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is executed in "super reach 1". (See FIG. 65 (c)).

As shown in FIG. 91, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X12 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). ) Is displayed on the image display device 13. The image of the operation promotion notification consists of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge, or the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of.

However, the effect image of (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 17A is in the protruding state during the operation valid period X12, and is an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A in the protruding state. Contains images.

On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12.

As shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 91, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. An effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" and emphasizing the second decorative member 16B in the image display device 13. Is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A2", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 17A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X12. The second decorative member 16B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 13 displays an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 16B. It controls the production to execute the corresponding production (development notice).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the image display device 13 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) is performed.
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A4", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 17A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the second decorative member 16B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 13 displays an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 16B. , And so on, to perform the production control to execute the corresponding production (development notice).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the image display device 13 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a2) is performed.
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A6", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 17A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the image display device 13 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

After that, the sub CPU 102a moves the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "operating position 2" to the "standby position 2", and displays a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown) on the image display device 13. After going, the special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were reduced and displayed only with numbers were returned to the display that was displayed with the character image and numbers that were displayed before becoming Super Reach. Control is performed so that the effect image shown in (a-4) is displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variable production related to variable production pattern A-019 (loss))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variable effect pattern A-019" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 88 (a). The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern A-031" shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation" in the period (a-1) from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and executes the "normal reach 1" in the period (a-2) from the timing T12 to the timing T13. The effect control for executing the effect of the period (a-3) of the "super reach 1" from the timing T13 is performed.

However, in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A-019", when the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A1", it is based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X12. As shown in (A-1) of FIG. 91, the second decorative member 16B as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the second decoration is performed on the image display device 13. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the member 16B is performed.
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A2", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 17A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X12. The second decorative member 16B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 13 displays an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 16B. It controls the production to execute the corresponding production (development notice).
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the image display device 13 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) is performed.
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A4", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 17A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the second decorative member 16B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 13 displays an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 16B. , And so on, to perform the production control to execute the corresponding production (development notice).
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the image display device 13 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a2) is performed.
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A6", as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 17A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the image display device 13 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).
At this time, the special effect symbol in a state where the middle symbol does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol is also reduced and displayed.

After that, the sub CPU 102a moves the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "operating position 2" to the "standby position 2", and displays a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown) on the image display device 13. After going, the special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were reduced and displayed only with numbers were returned to the display that was displayed with the character image and numbers that were displayed before the super reach. Control is performed so that the effect image shown in (A-2) is displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable production related to variable production pattern A-035 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variable effect pattern A-035" is selected in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a has the timing shown in FIG. 88 (b). The effect control for executing the variable effect from T21 to the timing T24 is performed.

92 to 94 show an effect image displayed on the image display device 13 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 88 (b), an effect button 17A, an effect lever 19A, a first decorative member 16A, and a second decorative member 16B. ing.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A-035", and executes the "symbol variation" in the period from the timing T22 to the timing T23 (b-). In 2), the "normal reach 1" is executed, and then, in the period (b-3) and the period (b-4) from the timing T23 to the timing T24, the effect control for executing the "special reach 1" is performed. ..

In the "design variation" in the period (b-1), the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) above, and then (a-1). The effect image of (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image of -2) or the effect image of (b-1--3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-3) is displayed.

Further, the variable icon TH is displayed in green (special mode 2) in the variable icon display area 70D, and the variable icon TH displayed in green (special mode 2) reaches in the variable effect. Is informed that will be done. Further, nothing is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, indicating that neither the first hold nor the second hold is stored.

The effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 92 shows the image of the corresponding effect in the “line notice A2”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A2", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a2" ("line a2") based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X21. Is it possible to acquire 100 cars? ”), And the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) of displaying the effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 92 on the image display device 13.

In the "normal reach 1" in the period (b-2), the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) of FIG. 93 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) of FIG. 90. , The effect image of (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-2), or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-3) is displayed.

The effect image shown in FIG. 93 (b-2-4) shows the image of the corresponding effect in the "character notice A2". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A2", the "character a2-2" is added based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y21 (b). -2-4) The corresponding effect (notice effect) of displaying the effect image on the image display device 13 is executed.

After that, when the sub CPU 102a shifts from the normal reach to the special reach (FIG. 93 (b-2-4) to FIG. 94 (b-3-1)), the sub CPU 102a displays a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown). After performing, only the numbers from the character image and the numbers that were displayed up to that point are the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are stopped and displayed in the reach state. In addition to changing to the simple display displayed in, the production image of the reach effect ((b-3-1) in Fig. 94) in which "Character b1 (Samurai)" tries to catch "Character c1 (Thief)" is displayed. Perform production control.

Further, since the game ball has entered the start port, the sub CPU 102a determines the hold mode to be white (normal mode) in the look-ahead effect determination process in step S1306, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. A white (normal mode) hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in this "special reach 1". In the specific effect execution period W21, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1313-33. When executing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 107 (b) in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A1" in the "special reach 1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 that enables the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. 88 (b). See FIG. 65 (d)).

As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 13 during the operation valid period X22. Perform the production to make. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-3), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Pull!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

As shown in (b-3-4) of FIG. 94, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X22. In addition, the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13. In addition to moving to, the image display device 13 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A2", as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 that enables the operation of the effect button 17A (see FIG. 88 (b)). ..

As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A on the image display device 13 during the operation valid period X22. Perform the production to make. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "press!" Together with the image of the effect button 17A in the protruding state and the timer gauge.

The image of the effect button 17A on the image display device 13 does not have to indicate the state of the effect button 17A during the operation valid period. For example, the image of the effect button 17A on the image display device 13 may indicate a non-projection state (first state) when the effect button 17A is in the projecting state (second state) during the operation valid period. When the effect button 17A is in the non-protruding state (first state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 17A on the image display device 13 may indicate the projecting state (second state).

In the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 16A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position) in this "decision effect". ) Does not work.

Further, in the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" in this "decision effect". Only move it.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that it has won the "first big hit" to play the game.

After that, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member from the "operating position 1-2" to the "standby position 1", and at the same time, the image display device 13 displays a whiteout or a blackout (not shown). ), The special production symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that was reduced and displayed only with numbers is returned to the display that was displayed with the character image and numbers that were displayed before the special reach. Control is performed to display the effect image shown in (b-4) of 94 on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variable production related to variable production pattern A-023 (loss))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variable effect pattern A-023" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 88 (b). The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern A-035" shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation" in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22, and executes the "normal reach 1" in the period (b-2) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. The effect control for executing the effect of the period (b-3) of the "special reach 1" from the timing T23 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a is set as the "decision effect A" in the "decision effect A1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect A" in the "variation effect pattern A-023" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (a). , And "decision effect A2" to execute the effect control.

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern A-023", the sub CPU 102a is the first decorative member 16A regardless of whether the "decision effect A1" or the "decision effect A2" of the "special reach 1" is executed. Is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position).

Then, after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown) on the image display device 13, the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that have been reduced and displayed only by numbers are displayed before the special reach. Control is performed so that the effect image shown in (B-1) of FIG. 94, which has been returned to the display displayed by the character image and the numerical value, is displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable production related to variable production pattern A-039 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variable effect pattern A-039" is selected in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a has the timing shown in FIG. 88 (c). The effect control for executing the variable effect from T31 to the timing T35 is performed. 95 to 98 show an effect image displayed on the image display device 13 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 88 (c), an effect button 17A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 16B, and a third decorative member 16C. ing.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A-039", and executes the "symbol variation" in the period from the timing T32 to the timing T33 (c-). In 2), "normal reach 1" is executed, then "super reach 1" is executed in the period from timing T33 to timing T34 (c-3), and the period from timing T34 to timing T35 (c-4). , The effect is controlled so as to execute "Special Reach 1" in the period (c-5).

The sub CPU 102a is the effect image of FIG. 95 (c-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-1) of FIG. 89 in the "design variation" in the period (c-1). Is displayed on the image display device 13.

Further, the variable icon TH is displayed in red (special mode 3) in the variable icon display area 70D, and the variable icon TH displayed in red (special mode 3) reaches in the variable effect. Is informed that will be done. Further, nothing is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, indicating that neither the first hold nor the second hold is stored.

The sub CPU 102a executes "line notice A" as a special effect in this "design variation".

The sub CPU 102a is set as "line notice A" in FIG. 65 (a) according to the execution ratio of "line notice A" in the "variation effect pattern A-039" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). ), Any one of "Serif notice A1" to "Serif notice A5" shown in the special production information table is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in "design variation", as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A is operated. Set the operation validity period X31 in which the above is valid (see FIG. 65 (a)).

During the operation validity period X31, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) of FIG. 95 including the image of the operation promotion notification on the image display device 13. do.

The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 95 shows the image of the corresponding effect in "Serif notice A3". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A3", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a3" ("line a3") based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X31. Is it possible to acquire ten cars? ”), And the corresponding effect (notice effect) of displaying the effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 95 on the image display device 13 is executed.

In the "normal reach 1" in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first obtains an image of the effect image of FIG. 96 (c-2-1) corresponding to the effect image of FIG. 90 (a-2-1). The effect to be displayed on the display device 13 is executed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "character notice A" as a special effect in this "normal reach 1".

The sub CPU 102a uses the "character notice A1" as the "character notice A" according to the execution ratio of the "character notice A" in the "variable effect pattern A-039" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). -Execute any of "Character Notice A5".

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 88 (c). The operation validity period Y31 is set (see FIG. 65 (b)).

The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A during the operation valid period Y31. That is, during the operation validity period Y31, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) of FIG. 96, which does not include the image of the operation promotion notification, on the image display device 13. Perform the production to be done.

The effect image shown in FIG. 96 (c-2-4) shows the image of the corresponding effect in the “character notice A3”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A3", the "character a2-3" is added based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y31 (the sub CPU 102a). A corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 13 is executed.

After that, when the sub CPU 102a shifts from the normal reach to the super reach (from FIG. 96 (c-2-4) to FIG. 97 (c-3-1)), the sub CPU 102a displays a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown). After performing, only the numbers from the character image and the numbers that were displayed up to that point are the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are stopped and displayed in the reach state. In order to execute an effect of displaying the effect image shown in (c-3-1) of FIG. 97 in which the "character a3 (A child)" appears on the image display device 13 while changing the display to the simple display displayed in. Perform production control.

Further, since the game ball has entered the start port, the sub CPU 102a determines the hold mode to be white (normal mode) in the look-ahead effect determination process in step S1306, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. A white (normal mode) hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1.

In this "super reach 1", the sub CPU 102a performs production control for executing the "development notice A" that fuels the development to the "special reach 1".

The sub CPU 102a is set as "development notice A1" as "development notice A" according to the execution ratio of "development notice A" in "variation effect pattern A-039" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (b). -The production control for executing any one of "development notice A6" is performed.

The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X32 that enables the operation of the effect button 17A regardless of whether any of the "development notice A1" to the "development notice A6" is executed in the "super reach 1" (FIG. 65). See (c)).

As shown in FIG. 97, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A (c-3-2) or an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X32. The effect of displaying the effect image of (c-3-3) including the image of (c-3-3) on the image display device 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge. Further, the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

FIG. 97 (c-3-4) shows an example of "development notice A1". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X32, as shown in FIG. 97 (c-3-4). An effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" and emphasizing the second decorative member 16B in the image display device 13. The effect is controlled to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

During the period (c-4) of the "special reach 1", the sub CPU 102a first, in the image display device 13, first "character b1 (samurai)" together with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. Controls the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect ((c-4-1) in FIG. 98) that tries to capture the "character c1 (thief)".
Even if the transition from super reach to special reach is made, the display mode of the special effect symbol is a simple display of only numbers, as in the case of super reach.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in this "special reach 1". Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A" in the "special reach 1", as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the operation valid period X33 for enabling the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A. (See FIG. 65 (d)).

In the operation valid period X33, as shown in FIG. 98, the sub CPU 102a includes the effect image shown in (c-4-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A, or the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification on the image display device 13 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification consists of the characters "press!" Along with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge in the protruding state (c-4-2), or the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of the characters "Pull it!" (C-4-3).

As shown in (c-4-4) of FIG. 98, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X33. In addition, the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13. In addition to moving to, the image display device 13 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

Further, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A2", it is shown in (c-4-4) of FIG. 98 based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed during the operation valid period X33. As shown, the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is placed at the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13 from the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1", which is the "operating position 1-". 2 ”, and the image display device 13 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).
At this time, the special effect symbols in the same numerical value are also reduced and displayed.

In the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 16A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position) in this "decision effect". ) Does not work.

Further, in the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" in this "decision effect". Only move it.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that it has won the "first big hit" to play the game.

After that, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 16A as a movable member from the "operating position 1-2" to the "standby position 1", and at the same time, the image display device 13 displays a whiteout or a blackout (not shown). ), The special production symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that was reduced and displayed only with numbers is returned to the display that was displayed with the character image and numbers that were displayed before becoming Super Reach. Control is performed to display the effect image shown in (c-5) of 98 on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variable production related to variable production pattern A-027 (loss))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variable effect pattern A-027" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 88 (c). The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern A-039" shown is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation" in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32, and executes the "normal reach 1" in the period (c-2) from the timing T32 to the timing T33. The "super reach 1" from the timing T33 to the timing T34 is executed, and the effect control for executing the effect of the period (c-4) of the "special reach 1" from the timing T34 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a determines the "decision effect A1" as the "decision effect A" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect A" in the "variation effect pattern A-027" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 64 (a). , And "decision effect A2" to execute the effect control.

However, in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A-027", the sub CPU 102a sets the first decorative member 16A to the "standby position 1" regardless of whether the "decision effect A1" or the "decision effect A2" is executed. Do not operate from to another position (operating position).

Then, in the image display device 13, after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown), the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that have been reduced and displayed only by numbers are displayed before becoming super reach. Control is performed so that the effect image shown in (C-1) of FIG. 98, which has been returned to the display displayed by the character image and the numerical value, is displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Specific example of variable production of production mode B1)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B1 set corresponding to the variation 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described.

In FIG. 99A, in the effect mode B1 (mode in which the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is balanced), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101, and “variates”. It is a time chart diagram of the variation effect to execute when "the effect pattern B1-021" is decided.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern B1-021 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern B1-021" is selected between the fluctuations of 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is set to The effect control for executing the variation effect from the timing T401 to the timing T403 shown in FIG. 99A is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern B1-021", and the timing is from the timing T402. In the period (d-2) and the period (d-3) up to T403, the effect control for executing "VS reach B-2" is performed.

During the period (d-1) of the "symbol variation", the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for displaying the effect image that changes the plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 13.

During this "symbol variation" period (d-1), the sub CPU 102a first receives the effect image (d-1-1) of FIG. 102 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change, and (d-1-2). Is performed to control the effect for displaying the image on the image display device 13.

Further, the variable icon TH is displayed in green (special mode 3) in the variable icon display area 70D, and the variable icon TH displayed in green (special mode 3) reaches in the variable effect. Is informed that will be done. Further, the white (normal mode) hold icons H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display units 70C1 to the fourth display units 70C4 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the second hold is stored as "4". It shows that it is.

The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing the "telop notice" in this "symbol variation". The sub CPU 102a is set as a "telop notice" as a "telop notice" according to the appearance ratio of the "telop notice" in the "variation effect pattern B1-021" shown in FIG. 99 (a) (excerpt from the telop notice pattern determination table 1 in FIG. 81). The effect control for executing any one of "notice pattern 1" to "telop notice pattern 8" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 102 (d-1-2), the sub CPU 102a has the telop frame and the character "hot!" Marked in the telop frame in FIG. 102 (d-1-) during the advance notice production period V41. The effect of displaying the effect image shown in 2) on the image display device 13 is executed.
As described above, this "hot!" Is a reach confirmation effect that notifies that the reach will be performed in the variable effect in which the telop notice is performed.

Then, in the period (d-2) of the "symbol fluctuation", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images of (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of the reach of FIG. 102, such as whether or not a reach state is generated, are displayed on the image display device 13. Controls the effect for display.

The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "development notice B1" that fuels the development to the "VS reach B-2" as a special effect in this "design variation". The sub CPU 102a is set as the "development notice B1" according to the execution ratio of the "development notice B1" in the "variation effect pattern B1-021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 1 ”and“ Development Notice B1-2 ”are controlled to be executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice B1-1" or "development notice B1-2", the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, is effective in the "design variation". Set the operation validity period X41. The operation validity period X41 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

As shown in FIG. 102, the sub CPU 102a has an effect image (d-2-1) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A or an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X41. The effect of displaying the effect image of the effect image (d-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice B1-1" is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge (d-2-1), and is "development notice B1". The image of the operation promotion notification of "-2" is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge (d-2-2).

(D-2-3) of FIG. 102 shows an example of "development notice B1-1". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice B1-1", the sub CPU 102a is pressed once with respect to the effect button 17A during the operation valid period X41, and is based on (d-2-) of FIG. 102. As shown in 3), it is controlled to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 13 by superimposing the effect image (effect b1) on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect.

Further, in the "development notice B1-2", the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 102 (d-2-3) based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X41. As described above, it is controlled to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 13 by superimposing the effect image (effect b2) on the special effect pattern of the reach fan effect.

After that, when the sub CPU 102a shifts to VS reach (from FIG. 102 (d-2-3) to FIG. 103 (d-3-1)), the sub CPU 102a performs a whiteout display or a blackout display (not shown). After that, the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are stopped and displayed in the reach state are displayed only by the numbers from the character image and the numbers that were displayed until then. The image display device displays the effect image shown in (d-3-1) of FIG. 103 in which the special character "character s2 (friend)" and the special character "character p2 (enemy)" fight with each other while changing to a simple display. The effect control for displaying on 13 is performed.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in this “VS reach B-2”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

Then, the sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect B1" in the "VS reach B-2". The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect B1" as a special effect in the "VS reach B-2". The sub CPU 102a has the "decision effect B1" as the "decision effect B1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect B1" in the "variation effect pattern B1-021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 66 (b). It is controlled to execute either "-1" or "decision effect B1-2".

FIG. 103 (d-3-2) shows an example of "decision effect B1-1". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect B1-1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X42 that enables the operation of the effect button 17A, which is an operation means, in the "VS reach B-2". The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((d-3-2) in FIG. 103) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting an operation to the effect button 17A in the protruding state during the operation valid period X42.

The sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 103 (d-3-4) based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X42 in this "decision effect B1-1". As shown, the effect image of "flash b1" is displayed, and the special effect symbol in a state where the same numerical values are aligned is displayed in a reduced size, and the first decorative member 16A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1". -1 ”is used to execute a“ decision effect ”(corresponding effect) such as moving the image to the“ operating position 1-2 ”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13.

FIG. 103 (d-3-3) shows an example of "decision effect B1-2". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect B1-2", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X42 that enables the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, in the "VS reach B-2". The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((d-3-3) in FIG. 103) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting an operation on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X42.

In this "decision effect B1-2", the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of "Senkou b2" and is the same based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X42. In addition to displaying the special effect symbol in a state of being aligned with the numerical values, the first decorative member 16A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" on the lower side of the front surface of the image display device 13. Execute a "decision effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to the position "operation position 1-2".

After that, the sub CPU 102a moves the second decorative member 16B as a movable member from the "operating position 1-2" to the "standby position 1", and at the same time, the image display device 13 displays a whiteout or a blackout (not shown). ), The special production symbol (left symbol and right symbol) that was reduced and displayed only with numbers is returned to the display that was displayed with the character image and numbers that were displayed before VS reach. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in (d-4) of 103 on the image display device 13 is performed.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

In the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 16A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operation) in this "decision effect B1". It does not operate up to the position).

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is changed from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1-1" in this "decision effect B1". Only move to.
As described above, in the "decision effect B1" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2" of, the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that the player has won the "1st jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

(Variable production related to variable production pattern B1-014 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern B1-014" is selected between the fluctuations of 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically In the above, the same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern B1-021" shown in FIG. 99 (a) is controlled. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (d-1) and period (d-2) from timing T401 to timing T402, and the period (d-3) and period from timing T402 to timing T403. In (d-4), the effect control is performed so as to execute "VS reach B-2". Further, when executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed during the execution of "VS Reach B-2".

The sub CPU 102a is set as the "decision effect B1" as the "decision effect B1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect B1" in the "variation effect pattern B1-014" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 66 (a). Control is performed to execute either "-1" or "decision effect B1-2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern B1-014", the sub CPU 102a may execute either the "decision effect B1-1" or the "decision effect B1-2" of the "VS reach B-2". , The first decorative member 16A is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position).

Then, after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown), the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were reduced and displayed only by numbers are displayed with the character image that was displayed before VS reach. Control is performed so that the effect image shown in (D-1) of FIG. 103, which has been returned to the display displayed by the numbers, is displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Specific example of variable effect of effect mode C1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 99B, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C1 that can be set corresponding to the variation 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described. ..

In FIG. 99B, in the effect mode C1 (mode in which the selection ratio of the reach confirmation effect is high), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101, and the “variation effect pattern” is shown. It is a time chart diagram of the variation effect to be executed when "C1-021" is determined.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (e-1) from the timing T501 to the timing T502 and the period (e-2) in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C1-021", and the timing T502. In the period (e-3) from to the timing T503 and the period (e-4), "VS reach C-2" is executed.

The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image that changes a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 13 during the period (e-1) of the “symbol variation”.

◇ In the effect mode C (effect mode C1 and effect mode C2), the display mode of the special effect symbol is another effect mode (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode D, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect). The display mode is different from that of mode G) (see FIG. 108 (c)). Further, in the effect mode C, the image display device 13 displays the storage status of the VS reach (see FIG. 108 (c)).

During the period (e-1) of this "symbol variation", the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing the "telop notice". The sub CPU 102a is set as a "telop notice" as a "telop notice" according to the appearance ratio of the "telop notice" in the "variation effect pattern C1-021" shown in FIG. 99 (b) (excerpt from the telop notice pattern determination table 2 in FIG. 82). The effect control for executing any one of "notice pattern 1" to "telop notice pattern 8" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 99 (b), the effect mode C has a higher reach than the other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode D, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). The production is easy to appear.

Then, in the period (e-2) of the "symbol fluctuation", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect control is performed so that the effect image of the reach fanning effect such as whether or not the reach state is generated is displayed on the image display device 13.

During this "design variation" period (e-2), the sub CPU 102a performs, as a special effect, an effect control for executing the "development notice C1" that fuels the development to the "VS reach C-2". The sub CPU 102a is set as "development notice C1" as "development notice C1-1" according to the execution ratio of "development notice C1" in the "variation effect pattern C1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , Performs production control for executing any one of "development notice C1-2".

When the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice C1-1" or "development notice C1-2", the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, is effective in the "design variation". Set the operation validity period X51. The operation validity period X51 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

In the operation valid period X51, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A or an effect image including an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect to be displayed on 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice C1-1" is an image consisting of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge, and the operation promotion notification of "development notice C1-2". The image of is an image consisting of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice C1-1", the sub CPU 102a becomes a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X51. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice C1-2", the effect is superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X51. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the image (effect b2 (orange)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a has displayed two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value that are stopped and displayed in the reach state during the period (e-3) of "VS reach C-2". A special character "Character s3 (ally) that is different from the special character that appeared in" VS Reach "in the production mode B, while changing the display from what was displayed with the character image and numbers to a simple display that displays only numbers. ) ”And the special character“ character p3 (enemy) ”fight to display the effect image on the image display device 13.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in this “VS reach C-2”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect C1" as a special effect in the "VS reach C-2". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "decision effect C1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect C1" in the "variation effect pattern C1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , "Decision effect C1-2" is executed. In the "decision effect C1-1" and "decision effect C1-2", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X52 as shown in FIG. 99 (b).

The sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (e-4) of "VS reach C-2". By having the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and the effect image notifying that the "character s3" has defeated the "character p3" is displayed on the image display device 13. Control the display.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.
At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect symbol by returning it from the simple display of only the numbers displayed in the VS reach to the display mode of the character image and the numbers displayed before the VS reach. do.

(Specific example of variable effect of effect mode D1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 100A, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D1 that can be set corresponding to the variation 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described. ..

In FIG. 100A, in the effect mode D1 (mode in which the selection ratio of the special effect is high), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101, and the “variation effect pattern D1” is shown. It is a time chart diagram of the fluctuation effect to be executed when "-021" is determined.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation" in the period (f-1) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 and the period (f-2) in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern D1-021", and the timing T602. In the period (f-3) from to the timing T603 and the period (f-4), "VS reach D-2" is executed.

The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image that changes a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 13 during the period (f-1) of the “symbol variation”.

◇ In the effect mode D (effect mode D1 and effect mode D2), the display mode of the special effect symbol is another effect mode (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect). The display mode is different from that of mode G) (see FIG. 108 (d)). Further, in the effect mode D, the image display device 13 displays the storage status of the VS reach (see FIG. 108 (d)).

During the period (f-1) of this "symbol variation", the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing the "telop notice". The sub CPU 102a is a "telop notice" as a "telop notice" according to the appearance ratio of the "telop notice" in the "variation effect pattern D1-021" shown in FIG. 100 (a) (excerpt from the telop notice pattern determination table 3 in FIG. 83). The effect control for executing any one of "notice pattern 1" to "telop notice pattern 8" is performed.

As shown in FIG. 100A, the effect mode D is different from the other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode E, effect mode F, effect mode G). Special effects (so-called premium effects), which are performed at a lower rate than the effects, are more likely to appear.

Then, during the period (f-2) of the "symbol fluctuation", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect control for displaying the effect image of the reach fanning effect on the image display device 13, such as whether or not the reach state is generated, is performed.

During this "design variation" period (f-2), the sub CPU 102a performs, as a special effect, an effect control for executing the "development notice D1" that fuels the development to the "VS reach D-2". The sub CPU 102a is set as a "development notice D1" as a "development notice D1-1" according to the execution ratio of the "development notice D1" in the "variable effect pattern D1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , Performs production control for executing any one of "development notice D1-2".

When the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice D1-1" or "development notice D1-2", the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, is effective in the "design variation". Set the operation validity period X61. The operation validity period X61 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

In the operation valid period X61, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A or an effect image including an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect to be displayed on 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice D1-1" is an image consisting of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge, and the operation promotion notification of "development notice D1-2". The image of is an image consisting of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D1-1", the sub CPU 102a becomes a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X61. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D1-2", the effect is superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X61. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the image (effect b2 (orange)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a has displayed two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value that are stopped and displayed in the reach state during the period (f-3) of "VS reach D-2". A special character "Character s4" that is different from the special character that appeared in "VS Reach" in the production modes B and C, while changing the display from what was displayed with the character image and numbers to a simple display that displays only numbers. (Friend) ”and the special character“ Character p4 (enemy) ”are fighting with each other.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W61 for executing the specific effect in this "VS reach D-2". Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect D1" as a special effect in the "VS reach D-2". The sub CPU 102a determines the "decision effect D1" as the "decision effect D1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect D1" in the "variation effect pattern D1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , "Decision effect D1-2" is executed. In the "decision effect D1-1" and "decision effect D1-2", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X62 as shown in FIG. 100 (a).

The sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (f-4) of "VS reach D-2". By having the same numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and the effect image notifying that the "character s4" has defeated the "character p4" is displayed on the image display device 13. Control the display.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.
At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect symbol by returning it from the simple display of only the numbers displayed in the VS reach to the display mode of the character image and the numbers displayed before the VS reach. ..

(Specific example of variable production of production mode E1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (b), a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode E1 that can be set corresponding to the variation 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described. ..

In FIG. 100 (b), in the effect mode E1 (mode in which VS reach is not executed), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101, and “variation effect pattern E1-021” is shown. It is a time chart diagram of the fluctuation effect to be executed when "" is determined.

The sub CPU 102a executes "design variation" in the period (g-1) from the timing T701 to the timing T702 and the period (g-2) in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern E1-021", and the timing T702. "Story reach 2" is executed in the period (g-3) and the period (g-4) from to the timing T703.

The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image that changes a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 13 during the period (g-1) of the “symbol variation”.

In addition, in the effect mode E (effect mode E1 and effect mode E2), the display mode of the special effect symbol is another effect mode (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode D, effect mode F, effect mode). The display mode is different from that of G) (see FIG. 108 (e)).
Further, in the effect mode E (effect mode E1 and effect mode E2), the display of the storage status of the VS reach to be displayed is not displayed in the effect modes B, C, and D. The reason why the display of the storage status of the VS reach is not displayed in the effect mode E is that the effect mode E does not have the “VS reach”.

During the period (g-1) of this "symbol variation", the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing the "telop notice". The sub CPU 102a is set as a "telop notice" as a "telop notice" according to the appearance ratio of the "telop notice" in the "variation effect pattern E1-021" shown in FIG. 100 (b) (excerpt from the telop notice pattern determination table 4 in FIG. 84). The effect control for executing any one of "notice pattern 1" to "telop notice pattern 8" is performed.

Then, during the period (g-2) of the "symbol fluctuation", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect control for displaying the effect image of the reach fanning effect on the image display device 13, such as whether or not the reach state is generated, is performed.

During this "design variation" period (g-2), the sub CPU 102a performs, as a special effect, an effect control for executing the "development notice E1" that fuels the development to the "story reach 2". The sub CPU 102a is set as a "development notice E1" as a "development notice E1-1" according to the execution ratio of the "development notice E1" in the "variable effect pattern E1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , Performs production control for executing any one of "development notice E1-2".

When the sub CPU 102a executes either "development notice E1-1" or "development notice E1-2", the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, is effective in the "design variation". Set the operation validity period X71. The operation validity period X71 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

In the operation valid period X71, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A or an effect image including an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect to be displayed on 13 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice E1-1" is an image consisting of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 17A and the timer gauge, and the operation promotion notification of "development notice E1-2". The image of is an image consisting of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice E1-1", the sub CPU 102a becomes a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X71. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice E1-2", the effect is superimposed on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X71. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image having the image (effect b2 (orange)) on the image display device 13 is performed.

During the period (g-3) of "Story Reach 2", the sub CPU 102a is a character that has previously displayed two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the same numerical value that are stopped and displayed in the reach state. An image (not shown) of the content of going on a journey to find a pet dog with the special character "Character s12" disappeared while changing the display from what was displayed with images and numbers to a simple display that displays only numbers The effect control to be displayed on the display device 13 is performed.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W71 for executing the specific effect in this “story reach 2”. Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect E1" as a special effect in the "story reach 2". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect E1" as the "decision effect E1" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect E1" in the "variation effect pattern E1-021" set in the special effect type determination table (not shown). , "Decision effect E1-2" is executed. In the "decision effect E1-1" and "decision effect E1-2", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X72 as shown in FIG. 100 (b).

The sub CPU 102a is the same as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (n-4) of "Story Reach 2". By becoming a numerical value, the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and the effect image of the "character s12" finding the pet dog is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 13.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.
At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect symbol by returning it from the simple display of only the numbers displayed in the story reach to the display mode of the character image and the numbers displayed before the story reach. do.

(Specific example of variable production of production mode F)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode F, which is set corresponding to the variation 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, will be described.

In the effect mode F, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control so as to execute a variation effect having a rock-paper-scissors effect in which two characters perform "rock-paper-scissors" as a variation effect.

In FIG. 101, in the effect mode F (mode set in the special figure variation number of 75 to 84 times), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” from the main control board 101, and “variation effect” is shown. It is a time chart diagram of the variation effect of "Pattern F-014".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern F-014 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern F-014" is selected between the fluctuations of 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a determines. The effect control for executing the variation effect from the timing T801 to the timing T803 shown in FIG. 101 is performed.

104 to 106 show an effect image displayed on the image display device 13 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 101, an effect button 17A, an effect lever 19A, and a first decorative member 16A.

The sub CPU 102a performs "design variation" in the period (h-1) to the period (h-3) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and the period (h-4) and the period (h) from the timing T802 to the timing T803. In -5), the effect is controlled so that "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (win)" is executed.

In the effect mode F, the display mode of the special effect symbol is different from that of other effect modes (effect mode A, effect mode B, effect mode C, effect mode D, effect mode E, effect mode G). It has become. Further, in the effect mode F, if the effect modes B, C, and D before shifting to the effect mode F are the effect modes B, C, and D in the image display device 13, the storage status of the VS reach is displayed (FIGS. 104 to 106). (See), in the effect mode E, the storage status of the VS reach is not displayed.

The sub CPU 102a also displays the effect images of (h-1-1) and (h-1-2) of FIG. 104 that change a plurality of special effect symbols during the "symbol variation" period (h-1). During the period (h-2), the effect image of (h-2) in FIG. 104 is displayed on the image display device 13 by superimposing the character display of "Let's win twice!" On the variable display of the special effect symbol. The production is controlled as follows.

The sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing the "telop notice" in this "symbol variation". The sub CPU 102a sets the "telop notice pattern 1" as the "telop notice" according to the appearance ratio of the "telop notice" in the "variation effect pattern F-014" shown in FIG. 101 (excerpt from the telop notice pattern determination table 5 in FIG. 85). "-" Telop notice pattern 8 "is performed to control the effect.

As shown in FIG. 104 (h-1-2), the sub CPU 102a has a telop frame and a character "Chance!" Marked in the telop frame in FIG. 104 (h-1-) during the advance notice production period V191. The effect of displaying the effect image shown in 2) on the image display device 13 is executed.
As described above, this "chance!" Is a reach confirmation effect that notifies that a reach will be performed in the variable effect in which the telop notice is performed.

Whether or not the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped from now on is stopped in the period (h-3) of the "symbol fluctuation". (H-3-1) in Fig. 104 or that the character "Character r1" of the ally and the character "Character u1" of the opponent perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors. The effect control for displaying the effect images of (h-3-2) and (h-3-3) on the image display device 13 is performed.

In the effect of the reach fanning, the sub CPU 102a has "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (" rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (" Execute "Development Notice F" to fuel the development to "Win)". The sub CPU 102a is set as "development notice F1" as "development notice F" according to the execution ratio of "development notice F" in "variation effect pattern F-014" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 70 (b). , Controls to execute any of "development notice F2".

When either "development notice F1" or "development notice F2" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, during the period (h-3). Set the operation validity period X81 to be valid.

The sub CPU 102a controls the player to execute the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X81. In the operation valid period X81, the sub CPU 102a controls to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect button 17A as shown in (h-3-1) of FIG. 104 if it is the "development notice F1". , If it is "development notice F2", as shown in (h-3-2) of FIG. 104, it is controlled to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice F1", the effect button 17A is set to the protruding state (second state) during the operation valid period X81, and is shown in FIG. 104 (h-3-1). As you can see, from the image of the effect button 17A in the protruding state, the image of the timer gauge, and the characters "Press!" The effect of displaying the effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A on the image display device 13 is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice F2", the "character r1" and the "character u1" are displayed in the operation valid period X81 as shown in (h-3-2) of FIG. Along with the production image of the appearance of "rock-paper-scissors" in the introduction part of the rock-paper-scissors, the image of the production lever 19A and the timer gauge and the production image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A consisting of the characters "close !!" The effect to be displayed on the display device 13 is executed.
It should be noted that the corresponding voice may be output from the voice output device 14 while displaying the effect image of the operation promotion notification.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice F1", the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 17A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X81, and the sub CPU 102a has a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect. , And a production image having an effect image (effect d1 (blue)) superimposed on the production image of the content that "character r1" wins "character u1" in the first round of rock-paper-scissors ((h-3-3) in FIG. 104. )) Is displayed on the image display device 13, and the corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice F2", the special production design of the reach fanning effect and the first round of rock-paper-scissors are based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is tilted during the operation valid period X81. In the image display device, an effect image ((h-3-3) in FIG. 104) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) is superimposed on an effect image in which "character r1" wins over "character u1". A corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying on 13 is executed.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W81 in the period (h-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2" and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W81, in order to vibrate the effect button 17A, the state of FIG. 107 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 107 (b), and the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 17A is displayed on the image display device 13. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), the sound output device 14 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A.

In the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (winning)" of the period (h-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2", the sub CPU 102a has two special effects of the same numerical value as shown in (h-4-1) of FIG. When the symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, "Character notice F" is executed. The sub CPU 102a uses the "character notice F1" as the "character notice F" according to the execution ratio of the "character notice F" in the "variable effect pattern F-014" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 70 (b). -Execute any of "Character Notice F3".

The sub CPU 102a is an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A during the period (h-4) regardless of which of "character advance notice F1" to "character advance notice F3" is executed as a special effect. Set the validity period Y81. During the operation valid period Y81, the sub CPU 102a notifies the player to operate the effect button 17A or the effect lever 19A as shown in (h-4-1) and (h-4-2) of FIG. 105. Do not execute.

In the "character notice F1", the sub CPU 102a is as shown in FIG. 105 (h-4-3) based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y81. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such that the support character "character d1" of the "character r1" is displayed on the image display device 13.

In the "character notice F2", the sub CPU 102a selects the "character d2" which is the support character of the "character r1" based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation validity period Y81. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on the image display device 13.

In the "character notice F3", the sub CPU 102a displays the "character d3", which is the support character of the "character r1", as an image display device based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period Y81. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on 13.

When executing this "character notice F", the sub CPU 102a stops in the reach state as shown in FIG. 105 (h-4-3) after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown). The control to display the above-mentioned cheering characters (characters d1 to d3) while changing the display of the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the same numerical value displayed to a simple display that displays only the numbers. conduct.

Then, after executing this "character notice F", the sub CPU 102a "characters" as shown in (h-4-4), (h-4-5), and (h-4-6) of FIG. 105. The effect control is performed so that the effect image of the content that "r1" and "character u1" perform the second round of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the image display device 13.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect F" as a special effect in the effect of the second round of rock-paper-scissors, as shown in the effect image of (h-4-4) (h-4-5) of FIG. 105.

The sub CPU 102a determines the "decision effect F1" as the "decision effect F" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect F" in the "variation effect pattern F-014" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 70 (b). , Or "decision effect F2" is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect F1" as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X82 that enables the operation of the effect button 17A during the period (h-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (win)". Set. Then, in the operation valid period X82, as shown in (h-4-4) of FIG. 105, the sub CPU 102a has "character r1" and "character u1" as "goo", "choki", and "par". In the effect image of the state before issuing any of the above, the operation promotion for urging the operation to the effect button 17A in the protruding state, which consists of the effect button 17A in the protruding state and the timer gauge, and the character display of "press !!" The effect control is performed so that the notification image is displayed.

In the "decision effect F1", the sub CPU 102a is a "flash" that fuels the winning of the jackpot in the image display device 13 based on the fact that the effect button 17A is pressed once during the operation valid period X82. The effect image of "d1" is displayed, and the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is placed at the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13 from the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1". Execute a "decision effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to the "operation position 1-2".

Further, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect F2" as a special effect, the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect lever 19A is valid during the period (h-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (win)". Set X82. Then, in the operation valid period X82, as shown in (h-4-5) of FIG. 105, the sub CPU 102a has "character r1" and "character u1" as "goo", "choki", and "par". In the effect image of the state before issuing any of the above, an image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A, which consists of the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of "close !!", is displayed. The production is controlled as follows.

In the "decision effect F2", the sub CPU 102a of the "flash d2" that encourages the winning of the jackpot in the image display device 13 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X82. An effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 16A as a movable member is placed at the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 13 from the "standby position 1" via the "operation position 1-1", which is the "operation position 1". Execute a "decision effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to "-2".

Further, in the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1-1" in this "decision effect F". Only move to.
As described above, in the "decision effect F" of the variable effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 16A is lower than the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2" of, the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that the player has won the "1st jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

After executing the "decision effect F" in the period (h-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (winning)", the sub CPU 102a is the second round of rock-paper-scissors as shown in the effect image (h-4-7) of FIG. In, "Character r1" issues "rock-paper-scissors" and "Character u1" issues "par", thereby displaying a production image of "Character r1" winning over "Character u1".

Then, after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown), as shown in the effect image (h-5) of FIG. 106 during the period (h-5), the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing. Is the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed earlier, so that the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value (h-). 5) The effect control for displaying the effect image on the image display device 13 is performed.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.
At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect symbol before the effect image (h-4-3) from the simple display of only the numbers displayed after the effect image (h-4-3). Return to the displayed image and display it. Further, since the three special effect symbols have stopped and the variation effect has ended, the variation icon TH displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared (erased).

(Variable production related to variable production pattern F-005 (loss))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern F-005" is selected between the fluctuations of 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 101. A variation effect substantially similar to the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern F-014" shown in the above is executed. That is, in the sub CPU 102a, the "design variation" in the period (h-1) to the period (h-3) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, that is, the "character r1" wins the "character u1" in the first round of rock-paper-scissors. It is controlled to execute "rock-paper-scissors reach 1 (losing)" after executing the variable effect of the special effect symbol including the effect. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (losing)", "character r1" is "character u1" and the second round of rock-paper-scissors, as in the variable production of the period (h-4) from the timing T802 of "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (winning)". Perform a reach effect, including an eye-catching effect.

The sub CPU 102a also executes the "decision effect F" as a special effect during the period (h-4) in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern F-005" as in the "variable effect pattern F-014".

The sub CPU 102a uses the "decision effect F1" as the "decision effect F" according to the execution ratio of the "decision effect F" in the "variation effect pattern F-005" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 70 (a). , Or "decision effect F2" is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 16A in the "decision effect F1" and "decision effect F2" of this "variation effect pattern F-005".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern F-005", the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 106 (H-1) after executing the "decision effect F1" in the "rock-paper-scissors reach 2 (losing)". In the second round of rock-paper-scissors, "Character r1" issues "Choki" and "Character u1" issues "Goo" to display a production image of "Character r1" losing to "Character u1".

Then, after performing whiteout display or blackout display (not shown), as shown in the effect image (H-2) of FIG. 106, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first. The effect control for displaying the effect image on the image display device 13 to stop the three special effect symbols in a state where they do not have the same numerical value by not having the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol). conduct.
As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".
At this time, the sub CPU 102a displays the special effect symbol before the effect image (h-4-3) from the simple display of only the numbers displayed after the effect image (h-4-3). Return to the displayed image and display it.

It should be noted that the production mode B2 to the production mode E2 are substantially the same as the production mode B1 to the production mode E1 except that the execution ratio of the special production is different and the music reach is not provided. Omit.

Here, the display mode of the special effect symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 108.

FIG. 108A is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode A is set is variablely displayed. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode A is displayed as a character and an image in which a number is marked at the lower right of the character.

FIG. 108 (b) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode B (effect mode B1 and effect mode B2) is set is variable display. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode B is displayed as a character and an image in which a number is marked on a diamond-shaped figure at the lower right of the character.
Further, the display of the storage status of the VS reach is displayed for each VS reach in nine squares, and the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area is displayed with an “x” mark (FIG. 113). reference).

FIG. 108 (c) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode C (effect mode C1 and effect mode C2) is set is variable display. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode C is displayed as a character and an image in which a number is marked on a square figure at the lower right of the character.
Further, the display of the storage status of the VS reach is displayed for each VS reach in nine squares, and the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area is displayed with an “x” mark (FIG. 113). reference).

FIG. 108 (d) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode D (effect mode D1 and effect mode D2) is set is variable display. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode D is displayed as a character and an image in which a number is marked on a star-shaped figure at the lower right of the character.
Further, the display of the storage status of the VS reach is displayed for each VS reach in nine squares, and the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area is displayed with an “x” mark (FIG. 113). reference).

FIG. 108 (e) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode E (effect mode E1 and effect mode E2) is set is variable display. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode E is displayed as a character and an image in which a number is marked on a round figure at the lower right of the character.

FIG. 108 (f) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode F is set is variablely displayed. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode F is displayed as an image in which a number is marked on an octagonal figure, and unlike FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (e), a character image is not displayed.
Further, in the effect mode F, if the effect modes before shifting to the effect mode F are the effect modes B, C, and D, the storage status of the VS reach is displayed in the same manner as the above-mentioned effect modes B, C, and D. If the effect mode before the transition is the effect mode E, the storage status of the VS reach is not displayed.

FIG. 108 (g) is an effect image when the special effect symbol displayed when the effect mode G is set is variablely displayed. The display mode of the special effect symbol in the effect mode G is displayed as an image in which a number is marked on a quadrangular figure, and unlike FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (e), a character image is not displayed.

FIG. 108 (h) is an effect image including a special effect symbol displayed when the reach effect (excluding the normal reach) is executed. During the reach effect (excluding the normal reach), it is displayed in a common display mode in which only numbers are displayed regardless of which effect mode is set.

The special effect symbols of FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (h) are displayed using common image data, and the size of the special effect symbol images is different (for example, FIGS. 108 (a) and 108 (f)). Etc.) are displayed by changing the display magnification (enlargement, reduction).

Further, since the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect modes A, E, and G does not have "VS reach" and "VS reach" is not executed, the storage status of VS reach is displayed. do not have.
Further, although the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode F does not have "VS reach", if the result of the jackpot determination becomes a jackpot during the effect mode F when shifting from the effect modes B, C and D, , The VS reach storage area may not be cleared and the mode may shift to the effect modes B, C, and D. Therefore, the storage status of the VS reach is displayed.

As described above, the display mode of the special effect symbol differs depending on the effect mode (FIGS. 108 (a) to (g)). However, as shown in FIG. 108 (h), when the special effect symbol in the reach effect (excluding the normal reach) is displayed in a reduced size, it is common to display only numbers regardless of which effect mode is set. It is displayed in the display mode. When the special effect symbol during the reach effect (excluding the normal reach) is displayed in a reduced size, the special effect symbol is displayed in a common display mode, but the special effect symbol when the reach effect is not in progress is displayed in a reduced size. When it becomes, the special effect symbol is not displayed in the common display mode.

In this way, when the special effect symbol is reduced during the reach effect, it is displayed in a common display mode in which only numbers are displayed, so that the reach effect is prevented from being hindered and is special to the player. It is possible to grasp the variable display of the effect pattern.

In the present embodiment, the special effect symbol is not a common display mode in the normal reach effect, but it may be a common display mode in the normal reach effect.

The display mode of the special effect symbol is not limited to the display mode of FIG. 108, and may be a display mode different depending on the effect mode. For example, a display mode in which the character of the special effect symbol is different depending on the effect mode may be used. , The display mode of the same character may be different from the display mode (pose, type of clothes, color, etc.) of the character, or the character of the special effect symbol performs some action (action) when the special effect symbol is stopped. The action may be different depending on the production mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode name currently set is not displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13, but it may be displayed. For example, "effect mode A" is displayed in the upper left (upper right, etc.) of the display area 130.
In addition to displaying the effect mode name, the characteristics of the set effect mode may also be displayed. For example, when the effect mode C is set, the display may be such as "the appearance rate of the effect mode C reach confirmed effect is increasing" or "the mode in which the effect mode C reach confirmed effect is likely to appear".

(Example of production when the first jackpot is won in production mode A and production mode B is selected)
An example of the effect when the first big hit is won in the effect mode A and the effect mode B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

When the first big hit is won in the effect mode A, the effect control for executing the "big hit effect 1" is performed. First, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 13 to display the effect image shown in FIG. 109 (a), which notifies that a predetermined character appears and that it is the first big hit.

Then, during the round game, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the image display device 13 displays the effect image during the round game when the result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot" in the effect mode A. ..

After that, when a predetermined round (here, 16 rounds) is completed, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the sub CPU 102a executes the "effect mode selection effect" in the predetermined period of the ending effect 1. In the "effect mode selection effect", the player can select which effect mode the effect mode (effect mode B to effect mode E) to be set after the jackpot game is set by using the selection button 18A (Fig.). 109 (c) (d)).

In the "effect mode selection effect", the sub CPU 102a has a settable effect mode option image, an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the selection button 18A, and the rest of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 109 (c). An effect control for displaying an image indicating the time on the image display device 13 is executed, and an operation valid period during which the operation of the selection button 18A is valid is set.

Then, when the operation valid period ends, the effect mode options (here, effect mode B) selected by the selection button 18A when the operation valid period ends are enlarged and displayed, and the set effect mode is notified. The effect image shown in FIG. 109 (d) is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 109 (e), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode B selected in the effect mode selection effect is performed.

Then, when the 75th variation effect is started without winning any of the big hits, the effect mode F is set to the common effect mode, and the variation effect according to the effect mode F is performed ( See FIG. 109 (f)).

(Example of production when the first jackpot is won in production mode A and production mode C is selected)
An example of the effect when the first big hit is won in the effect mode A and the effect mode C is selected will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) and 110.
It should be noted that FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) are omitted because they have been described in the description of the effect example when the first big hit is won in the above-mentioned effect mode A and the effect mode B is selected.

When a predetermined round (here, 16 rounds) is completed after FIG. 109 (b), as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs the “effect mode selection effect” in the predetermined period of the ending effect 1. To execute. In the "effect mode selection effect", the player can select which effect mode to set the effect mode (effect mode B to effect mode E) to be set after the jackpot game ends by using the selection button 18A (Fig.). 110 (a) (b)).

In the "effect mode selection effect", the sub CPU 102a has a settable effect mode option image, an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the selection button 18A, and the rest of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 110 (c). An effect control for displaying an image indicating the time on the image display device 13 is executed, and an operation valid period during which the operation of the selection button 18A is valid is set.

Then, when the operation valid period ends, the effect mode options (here, effect mode C) selected by the selection button 18A when the operation valid period ends are enlarged and displayed, and the set effect mode is notified. The effect image shown in FIG. 110 (b) is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode C selected in the effect mode selection effect is performed.

Then, when the 75th variation effect is started without winning any of the big hits, the effect mode F is set to the common effect mode, and the variation effect according to the effect mode F is performed (. (See FIG. 110 (d)).

(Example of production when the first jackpot is won in production mode A and production mode D is selected)
An example of the effect when the first big hit is won in the effect mode A and the effect mode D is selected will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) and 111.
It should be noted that FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) are omitted because they have been described in the description of the effect example when the first big hit is won in the above-mentioned effect mode A and the effect mode B is selected.

After the predetermined round (16 rounds in this case) is completed after FIG. 109 (b), as shown in FIG. 111 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs the “effect mode selection effect” in the predetermined period of the ending effect 1. To execute. In the "effect mode selection effect", the player can select which effect mode to set the effect mode (effect mode B to effect mode E) to be set after the jackpot game ends by using the selection button 18A (Fig.). 111 (a) (b)).

In the "effect mode selection effect", the sub CPU 102a has a settable effect mode option image, an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the selection button 18A, and the rest of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 111 (a). An effect control for displaying an image indicating the time on the image display device 13 is executed, and an operation valid period during which the operation of the selection button 18A is valid is set.

Then, when the operation valid period ends, the effect mode options (here, effect mode D) selected by the selection button 18A when the operation valid period ends are enlarged and displayed, and the set effect mode is notified. The effect image shown in FIG. 111B is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode D selected in the effect mode selection effect is performed.

Then, when the 75th variation effect is started without winning any of the big hits, the effect mode F is set to the common effect mode, and the variation effect according to the effect mode F is performed (. See FIG. 111 (d)).

(Example of production when the first jackpot is won in production mode A and production mode E is selected)
An example of the effect when the first big hit is won in the effect mode A and the effect mode E is selected will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) and 112.
It should be noted that FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) are omitted because they have been described in the description of the effect example when the first big hit is won in the above-mentioned effect mode A and the effect mode B is selected.

When a predetermined round (here, 16 rounds) is completed after FIG. 109 (b), as shown in FIG. 112 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs the “effect mode selection effect” in the predetermined period of the ending effect 1. To execute. In the "effect mode selection effect", the player can select which effect mode to set the effect mode (effect mode B to effect mode E) to be set after the jackpot game ends by using the selection button 18A (Fig.). 112 (a) (b)).

In the "effect mode selection effect", the sub CPU 102a has a settable effect mode option image, an operation promotion image prompting the operation of the selection button 18A, and the rest of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 112 (a). An effect control for displaying an image indicating the time on the image display device 13 is executed, and an operation valid period during which the operation of the selection button 18A is valid is set.

Then, when the operation valid period ends, the effect mode options (here, effect mode E) selected by the selection button 18A when the operation valid period ends are enlarged and displayed, and the set effect mode is notified. The effect image shown in FIG. 112 (b) is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode E selected in the effect mode selection effect is performed.

Then, when the 75th variation effect is started without winning any of the big hits, the effect mode F is set to the common effect mode, and the variation effect according to the effect mode F is performed (. See FIG. 112 (d)).
If the effect mode before being set to the effect mode F is the effect mode E (E2), the storage status of the VS reach is not displayed.

(Example of production when the second big hit is won in production mode B)
An example of the effect when the second big hit is won in the effect mode B will be described with reference to FIG. 113.
Since VS reach B-1 is stored in the VS reach storage area, the cells of VS reach B-1 in the display of the storage status of VS reach are marked with an “x”.

When the second big hit is won in the effect mode B, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect control for executing the "big hit effect 5". First, the image display device 13 displays the effect image shown in FIG. 113 (a), which notifies that a predetermined character appears and that it is the second big hit.

Then, during the round game, as shown in FIG. 113B, the image display device 13 displays the effect image during the round game when the result of the jackpot determination is "second jackpot" in the effect mode B. ..

After that, when the predetermined round (here, 4 rounds) is completed, the effect image of the ending effect 5 when the result of the jackpot determination in the effect mode B is "second jackpot" is displayed on the image display device 13.

In addition, unlike the ending effect in the case of the first jackpot shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 described above, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, when the result of the jackpot determination is the second jackpot, the effect is produced. No mode selection effect is performed.

Then, at the end of the ending effect 5, the effect image shown in FIG. 113 (c) for notifying that the effect mode (here, the effect mode B) set before the big hit is continued (reset). Is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode B set before the big hit is performed.

(Example of production that won the first big hit when all VS reach associated with production mode B is memorized)
FIG. 114 will be used to describe an example of an effect in which the first jackpot is won when all the VS reach associated with the effect mode B is stored.
Since VS reach B-1, B-2 and B-3 are stored in the VS reach storage area, the cells of VS reach B-1, B-2 and B-3 for displaying the storage status of VS reach are stored. Is marked with an "x".

In the effect mode B, if the first jackpot is won while all the VS reach associated with the effect mode B is stored, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect control for executing the "special jackpot effect 1". .. First, a special character that appears only in the special jackpot effect appears, and the effect image shown in FIG. 114 (a) that notifies that the special jackpot effect is displayed is displayed on the image display device 13.

Then, during the round game, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the result of the jackpot determination in the effect mode B is the "first jackpot" and the VS reach (VS reach B-1) associated with the effect mode B. , VS reach B-2, VS reach B-3), which is different from the case where all VS reach associated with the effect mode B is not stored. The image is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, when a predetermined round (here, 16 rounds) is completed, the result of the jackpot determination in the effect mode B is "first jackpot", and the VS reach (VS reach B-1,; A production image of the special ending effect 1 that is different from the case where all the VS reach B-2 and VS reach B-3) are memorized and the VS reach associated with the effect mode B is not memorized. It is displayed on the image display device 13.

Then, in the predetermined period of the special ending effect 1, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the option image of the effect mode that can be set, the operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the selection button 18A, and the remaining time of the operation valid period are displayed. The image to be shown is displayed on the image display device 13, and the "effect mode selection effect" for setting the operation validity period for enabling the operation of the selection button 18A is executed.

Then, when the operation valid period ends, the effect mode options (here, effect mode C) selected by the selection button 18A when the operation valid period ends are enlarged and displayed, and the set effect mode is notified. The effect image shown in FIG. 114 (d) is displayed on the image display device 13.

After that, in the variable effect after the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 114 (e), the variable effect corresponding to the effect mode C selected in the effect mode selection effect is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect modes A and G are set, that is, when the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not set, the first jackpot or the second jackpot (so-called). , First hit), the first jackpot and the first jackpot when all VS reach associated with each of the ending effects, effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D are memorized. In the ending effect when two big hits are won, and the ending effect when the first and second big hits are memorized when all VS reach is memorized, each feature is the effect mode after the big hit game. By operating the selection button 18A from among a plurality of different effect modes, the effect mode selection effect that can be arbitrarily selected (set) is executed.

The plurality of production modes having different characteristics as described above are the production mode B, which is a standard production mode in which "VS reach" can be executed, and the production mode B, in which "VS reach" can be executed. It is possible to execute the production mode C, which is the production mode in which the reach confirmation effect for notifying that the reach is performed is easy to appear (select), and the "VS reach", and other effects than the other production modes. Production mode D, which is an production mode in which special effects (so-called premium productions) that are less likely to be executed than in the above are more likely to appear (select), and production modes in which "VS reach" cannot be executed. Mode E.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select (set) the effect mode after the jackpot game from a plurality of effect modes having different characteristics, so that the player can play the game in the effect mode desired by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the effect modes B, C, and D in which the "VS reach" can be executed, all the "VS reach" associated with each effect mode are stored in the VS reach storage area. If the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, a special jackpot effect different from the normal jackpot effect (ending effect) is executed.
In this way, the jackpot effect (ending effect) when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is changed based on the storage status of the "VS reach" in the VS reach storage area. Can be improved.

Further, in the variable effect in the effect modes B, C, and D, which are the effect modes in which the "VS reach" can be executed, the execution ratio of the "VS reach" stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c is low. ing.
In this way, by lowering the execution rate of "VS reach" based on the storage status of "VS reach" in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the execution rate of "VS reach" is always constant. This is no longer the case, and this makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the variable effect in the effect modes B, C, and D in which the "VS reach" can be executed, the determination result of the jackpot determination is obtained for the "VS reach" stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Is not executed when "missing", and is executed only when the judgment result of the jackpot determination is "big hit".
In this way, based on the storage status of "VS reach" in the VS reach storage area, it is not executed when the judgment result of the jackpot determination is "missing", and is executed only when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit". By setting the execution ratio not to be set, the execution ratio of "VS reach" is not always a constant execution ratio, which can improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, only the effect mode name (for example, effect mode B) is displayed in the effect mode option image (such as FIG. 109 (c)) that can be set in the effect mode selection effect. , The feature of the effect mode may be displayed together with the display of the effect mode name. For example, in the case of the option image of the effect mode C, the display may be such as "a mode in which the appearance rate of the effect mode C reach confirmed effect is increased" or "a mode in which the effect mode C reach confirmed effect is likely to appear".

Further, in the variable effect in the effect modes B, C, and D, when the "VS reach" stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c is executed, since the jackpot is confirmed, it is stored in the VS reach storage area. If it has not been performed, the jackpot confirmation effect that was not executed may be added to the "VS reach" and executed. For example, a special sound (such as a cure-in-cure) may be output from the audio output device 14 at the start or during the fluctuation of the variation effect in which VS reach is executed, or the effect lighting device 15 may emit rainbow-colored light. Character images may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the VS reach storage area is cleared when the power is cut off (power is turned off). Therefore, in the fluctuation effect after the power is restored, the VS reach stored in the VS reach storage area before the power is cut off. Since the VS reach storage area is cleared even if is executed, the determination result of the jackpot determination may be "missing".

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode selection effect is the ending effect when the first jackpot is won, and when the effect mode A (and the effect mode G) is set, the first jackpot and the second jackpot are won. When the first jackpot and the second jackpot are won when all the VS reach associated with each of the ending effect, the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D is memorized. It was designed to be executed in the ending effect of the above and the ending effect when the first jackpot and the second jackpot are won when all the VS reach is memorized, but as in the second embodiment described later, When the ending effect and the effect mode A (and the effect mode G) are set when the first big hit is won, the ending effect when the first big hit and the second big hit are won may be performed. Further, after being set to the specific gaming state, the ending effect may be performed when the number of times the jackpot is won is equal to or more than the specific number of times without being set to the normal gaming state (so-called consecutive villa jackpot). However, it may be performed when the operating means is operated at a specific timing during the big hit (during the round game, during the ending effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the ending effect when the first jackpot and the second jackpot are won when all the VS reach associated with each effect mode is stored, the effect mode selection effect is performed. However, it is not limited to the case where all VS reach is memorized, and it may be performed if at least a majority is memorized. For example, when 6 types of VS reach are set, if 4 types of VS reach are stored, the effect mode selection effect is executed.

Further, the effect to be memorized is not limited to "VS reach", and other reach may be memorized, or may be a specific advance notice effect (step-up notice, cut-in notice, character notice, etc.). For example, it is possible to set a character notice in which any character appears from a plurality of characters and memorize the appearing character.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode selection effect is executed in the ending effect, but it may be performed at the start of the jackpot game (opening effect) or in the round effect. However, the first variation effect or the first variation effect and the second variation effect in the specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) after the jackpot game may be used may be performed, or the customer is waiting. It may be performed during the variable effect in the normal game state (effect mode A).

Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won during a normal game (so-called first hit), either the first big hit (high profit hit) or the second big hit (small profit hit) Even if you win the game, the effect mode selection effect is performed, but if you win the second big hit (a hit with a small profit) during a normal game, the effect mode selection effect is not performed and the predetermined effect mode is set. It may be set, or if the second big hit (a hit with a small profit) is won during a normal game, the effect mode of the specific game state may be randomly determined.

Further, the execution timing of the effect mode selection effect may be different depending on the type of jackpot that triggers the execution of the effect mode selection effect. For example, the effect mode selection effect may be executed in a round game in which the first jackpot (a hit with a large profit) and the second jackpot (a hit with a small profit) are different, or the jackpot is won during a normal game. In the case of (so-called first hit), when the effect mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot game (opening effect-ending effect) and the jackpot is won with all the VS reach of the set effect mode memorized. May execute the effect mode selection effect in the variable effect in the specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) after the big hit game.

Further, the selectable effect mode may be different depending on the type of jackpot that triggers the execution of the effect mode selection effect. For example, if a jackpot is won with all the VS reach of the set production mode memorized, a new production mode (effect mode H) that could not be selected if the jackpot is won during a normal game. May be added, or the currently set production mode may not be selectable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the VS reach storage area is erased when the mode A (normal game state) is entered, but the timing of erasing is not limited to this timing, and the mode A shifts to the effect mode A. Further, it may be when the state shifts to the customer waiting state, the power may be turned off, or it may be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, one day).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode set in the effect mode selection effect is the effect mode in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the big hit game, but the effect in the specific game state. Not limited to the mode. For example, the effect mode in the normal gaming state may be set, or if the jackpot is set to the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot game, the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are set. You may set the production mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reach confirmation effect is limited to the special aspects 2 to 5 of the display mode of the reserved image in the look-ahead effect and the telop notice pattern 5 to 8 of the telop notice effect. It may be used as another production. For example, a step-up notice effect in which the step-up is performed three or more times may be used as a reach confirmation effect, or the dialogue notice executed in the effect mode A of the present embodiment may be in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state ( It can also be executed in the effect modes B to F), and the one in which a predetermined line appears in the line notice may be used as the reach confirmation effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special effect (so-called premium effect), which is executed at a lower rate than the other effects, is the special aspect 5 of the display mode of the reserved image in the look-ahead effect and the telop notice effect. The telop notice pattern 8 was used, but the present invention is not limited to these, and other effects may be used. For example, a special effect (so-called premium effect) in which the step-up is performed the maximum number of times in the step-up notice effect may be performed at a lower rate than other effects, and the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. During the variable effect of the case, the effect of outputting a predetermined sound (big hit confirmed sound) may be used as the big hit confirmation effect, or the content is different from the pseudo continuous notice executed in other production modes (as a pseudo continuous notice). A pseudo continuous notice (displaying a special production image) may be used.
Further, the effect may not be based on the determination result of the jackpot determination. For example, an image (character image, background image, etc.) that does not appear in other effect modes may appear during the variable effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the special effect symbol is different depending on the effect mode (see FIG. 108). However, in the case of the special effect symbol that has been reduced during the reach effect, it is displayed in a common display mode in which only numbers are displayed regardless of which effect mode is set.
When the special effect symbol during the reach effect is reduced, the special effect symbol is displayed in a common display mode, but when the special effect symbol during the reach effect is not reduced, the special effect symbol is displayed in the same display mode. The special effect symbol is not displayed in a common display mode.
In this way, when the special effect symbol is reduced during the reach effect, it is displayed in a common display mode in which only numbers are displayed, so that the reach effect is prevented from being hindered and is special to the player. It is possible to grasp the variable display of the effect pattern.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the production mode in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the big hit game, the number of fluctuations is 1 to 30 times in the first half period and the number of fluctuations is 31 to 74 times. The middle stage period of the times and the latter half period of 75 to 84 times of fluctuation are divided, and the production modes (production modes B, C, D, E) of the first half period and the middle stage period are the above-mentioned production mode selection effects. Corresponding to the selected effect mode, the effect mode in the latter half period is a common effect mode (effect mode F) that shifts regardless of which effect mode is set in the first half and the middle stage period.

It should be noted that the number of fluctuations is 75 to 84 times as a common production mode, but the number of fluctuations is not limited to this. For example, a common production mode may be set in which the number of fluctuations during the middle stage period is 31 or later.
In addition, the production mode in the specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) after the big hit game is divided into three periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two periods, the first half period and the second half period, may be used. It may be four periods.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101a counts the number of fluctuations in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the big hit game, and the number of fluctuations in the main ROM 101b is 1 to 30 times in the first half period. Special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the middle period of 31 to 74 fluctuations, and special map fluctuation pattern determination table for the latter half period of 75 to 84 fluctuations. By determining the special figure fluctuation pattern based on Only the common special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is used regardless of the number of fluctuations in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state), and the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state) after the jackpot game is performed by the sub CPU 102a. The number of fluctuations in the state) is counted, and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for the first half period in which the number of fluctuations in the sub ROM 102b is 1 to 30 times, and the variation effect pattern determination table for the middle period period in which the number of fluctuations is 31 to 74 times. By determining the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table for the latter half period in which the number of variations is 75 to 84 times, the variation effect (effect mode) differs depending on the period in the specific gaming state. It may be configured to be used. For example, when the number of fluctuations in the specific gaming state counted by the sub CPU 102a reaches 75 times, the variation effect pattern determination table for the latter half period in which the number of fluctuations is 75 to 84 times is referred to, and the effect mode is set to the effect mode. Set to F.

Further, the timing of shifting to the effect mode F, which is a common effect mode, that is, the 74th variation effect in the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, D2, E2) may be a dedicated variation effect. For example, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the 74th time in the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, D2, E2) may be provided in the main ROM 101b to perform a dedicated effect with different variation times, or the sub ROM 102b may be produced. A variable effect pattern determination table for the 74th time in mode B2 (effect modes C2, D2, E2) may be provided to perform a dedicated effect.

Further, in the variable effect of the effect mode A to the effect mode F, the sub CPU 102a causes the effect button 17A to be in a non-protruding state (first) during the operation validity period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 17A is performed. State) or protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a puts the effect button 17A in a non-protruding state (first state) while the sub CPU 102a keeps the effect button 17A in a non-protruding state (first state) during the operation validity period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 17A is not performed. I try not to say (the state of).

◆ Further, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, D1, E1) is varied (first variation). The variable effect (31st to 74th variation) of the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, D2, E2) sets the operation valid period during the variable effect at a higher rate than the 30th), and the effect mode B2 (effect mode B2 (effect mode B2). The variable effect of the effect mode F (75th to 84th variation) sets the operation valid period during the variable effect at a higher rate than the variable effect of the effect mode C2, D2, E2).

Further, in the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect is determined by using the specific effect determination table of FIGS. 72 to 73. In this determination, it is easier to determine that the specific effect is executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss, and it is easier to determine that the specific effect is executed in the reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit. Then, when executing the specific effect, it is determined whether or not the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the presence or absence of the output of the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A, and the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 17A.

◆ The vibration speed of the effect button 17A in the specific effect determines whether the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed or at low speed by using the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIGS. 74 to 75. It is easier to determine that the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss, and it is easier to determine that the effect button 17A is vibrated at high speed in the reach effect with a higher expectation of big hit. Further, the presence or absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A in the specific effect is determined by using the specific effect sound output determination table of FIGS. 76 to 77. It is easier to determine that the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A is output in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss, and the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 17A is more likely to be reached as the jackpot expectation is higher. Is output to make it easier to determine. Further, whether or not the image of the effect button 17A is output in the specific effect is determined by using the specific effect image output determination table of FIGS. 78 to 79. It is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 17A is output in the case of a big hit than in the case of loss, and it is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 17A is output in the reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit.

In this way, when performing a specific effect, any one of the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the presence / absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 17A, the presence / absence of the display of the image of the effect button 17A, and FIG. As shown, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the jackpot expectation degree in multiple stages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the vibration speed of the effect button 17A, the presence / absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 17A, and the presence / absence of the display of the image of the effect button 17A are used to determine the jackpot expectation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the size of the image of the effect button 17A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the size of the output sound, and the like may be used. Further, the sound output in the specific effect may be a sound effect peculiar to the specific effect, a specific line, or the like, instead of the pseudo sound of the vibrating effect button 17A. Further, when performing a specific effect, a plurality of types of sounds may be output, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the types of output sounds.

Further, the specific effect may be performed by the vibration of the effect lever 19A instead of the vibration of the effect button 17A, or by the lighting or blinking of the LED built in the effect button 17A instead of the vibration of the effect button 17A. It may be an effect that makes 17A appear to be operating. Further, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 17A, and the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested by the presence or absence of the operation of the object and the speed of the operation. Further, the effect button 17A may be rotated to perform a specific effect, and the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the presence or absence of rotation, the rotation speed, and the rotation direction. Further, the effect button 17A may be projected to perform a specific effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (when the effect mode A is set), which is the normal gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 65, the first operating means is used. The ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of a certain effect button 17A is higher than the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A which is the second operation means. On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (when the effect modes B to F), which are the specific game states, the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the second operation means, is performed as shown in FIGS. 66 to 71. The ratio of prompting operation promotion notification is higher than the ratio of performing operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A which is the first operation means. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 17A, and in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect lever 19A. .. As a result, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting the operation means according to the game state and improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A and the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A are different depending on the gaming state. Not limited to, for example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed, but only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is performed, or the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is performed. In the gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A and the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed, but in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the operation promotion notification is performed. , The operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 17A is used as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operation means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operation means. 2 The effect button 17A may be used as the operation means. Further, as the first operation means and the second operation means, a button for effect different from the effect button 17A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, or the like may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 17A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, and in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the player presses the effect lever 19A. It is used more frequently. However, not limited to this, if the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect button 17A and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect lever 19A are different between the first half period and the second half period, for example, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. You may let it. In the present embodiment, for example, in the effect mode B1 (effect mode C1, D1, E1), the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A, which is the first operation means, is set to the second operation. It is set higher than the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the means, and when the effect mode B2 (effect mode C2, D2, E2) is set, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The ratio is set higher than the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A. Further, in the effect mode F, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the effect mode B2 (effect modes C2, D2, E2). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state.

Further, it is possible to execute the reach effect using only the effect button 17A and the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A, and the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect button 17A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state is high. In the high, high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, there are two types of effects, one is for the effect button 17A and the other is for the effect lever 19A. In the time-saving game state, the appearance frequency of the effect dedicated to the effect lever 19A may be increased.

In the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17A a plurality of times, such as "press the button repeatedly". In this case, the operation promotion notification is ". Count as "once". For example, even if there is one operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 17A five times, if there are two operation promotion notifications prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, the player uses the effect button 17A. It can be said that the frequency of using the effect lever 19A is higher than the frequency of using the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are two operation means, that is, the effect button 17A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and more such as the third operation means. May have the type of operating means. When having three or more types of operating means, the frequency of use of each operating means (the appearance rate of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of each operating means) may be different depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state as a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state as a specific gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. A gaming state such as a low-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state may correspond to a specific gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is a low-probability gaming state which is a normal gaming state as compared with a high-probability gaming state which is a specific gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. Moreover, the rate of execution is higher in the non-time saving game state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 17A is lower than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming states. .. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect button 17A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is a high-probability game that is a specific game state as compared with the case of the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state that are the normal game states. The rate of execution is higher in the case of the state and the short-time game state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming states. .. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect lever 19A.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the main CPU 101a is specified to be advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot game is completed. The game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) is set, and the specific game state is terminated when the number of judgments of the jackpot judgment (the number of times the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times in the specific game state. It has been described as a so-called "ST machine". However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the case of being an "ST machine", and the high-probability state continues until the next big hit is won (or, for example, the high-probability gaming state continues 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a "big hit" and a "normal jackpot" in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability gaming state.

In the case of such a gaming machine, for example, the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game is changed from 1 to 99 times is defined as the above-mentioned "first period", and after the jackpot game. The period in which the number of changes of the special symbol is 100 times or more may be referred to as the above-mentioned "second period". In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during the variation effect in the "second period" at a higher rate than the "first period".
Further, in this case, the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game is changed from 1 to 99 times is set to the effect mode selected in the above-mentioned effect mode selection effect, and the period of 100 times or more is set. Set to a common production mode.

(2nd embodiment of the present invention)
115 to 116 are the second embodiments of the present invention. It differs from the first embodiment of the present invention in that the execution conditions of the "effect mode selection effect" are different.

First, a second embodiment of the effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. For the same processing as in FIG. 45, the reference numerals are the same.

In step S1414-12, the sub CPU 102a has the ending effect patterns ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, ED-10, ED-11, which are currently being performed. It is determined whether or not it is ED-14, ED-15, ED-18, ED-20 or ED-22. The sub CPU 102a has an ending effect pattern ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, ED-10, ED-11, ED-14, ED-15, ED-18, ED-20 or ED-22. If it is determined to be, the process is transferred to step S1414-2, and the ending effect patterns ED-1, ED-2, ED-5, ED-6, ED-10, ED-11, ED-14, ED-15, If it is determined that it is not ED-18, ED-20 or ED-22, the process is transferred to step S1414-9.

In step S1414-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation is valid during the ending effect. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation is valid, the process shifts to step S1414-3, and if it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process.

In step S1414-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has been operated. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has been operated, the process shifts to step S1414-7, and determines that the left portion 182A or the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A has not been operated. , Step S1414-4.

In step S1414-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation valid period in the ending effect has expired. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation valid period has expired, it shifts the process to step S1414-5, and when it determines that the operation valid period has not expired, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process.

In step S1414-5, the sub CPU 102a is set to the currently selected effect mode. Specifically, the selection counter is confirmed, and the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the selection counter is stored in the effect mode flag storage area. For example, if the selection counter = 00, the effect mode B1 is indicated, the effect mode flag “01H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and if the selection counter = 01, the effect mode C1 is indicated. The effect mode flag "02H" is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and if the selection counter = 02, the effect mode D1 is indicated, and the effect mode flag "03H" is stored in the effect mode flag storage area, and the selection counter is selected. If = 03, the effect mode E1 is indicated, and the effect mode flag “04H” is stored in the effect mode flag storage area.

In step S1414-6, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode set in step S1414-5 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command. The effect content is preset in each effect mode, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image display displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 and the BGM output from the audio output device 14 It is executed as a basic effect by the output and effect mode.

In step S1414-7, the sub CPU 102a updates the selection counter. Specifically, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 00, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 00, and the selection counter = 01.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 00, the selection counter = 00 is set to “-1” and the selection counter = 03.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 01, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 01, and the selection counter = 02.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 01, "-1" is performed on the selection counter = 01, and the operation counter = 00.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 02, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 02, and the selection counter = 03.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 02, "-1" is applied to the selection counter = 02, and the selection counter = 01.

Further, when the right portion 184A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 03, "+1" is performed on the selection counter = 03, and the selection counter = 00.

Further, when the left portion 182A of the selection button 18A is operated in step S1414-3, if the selection counter = 03, "-1" is performed on the selection counter = 03, and the selection counter = 02.

In step S1414-8, the sub CPU 102a sets a selection switching control command indicating that the effect mode indicated by the selection counter updated in step S1414-7 is selected in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The selection switching control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the selection switching control command, the effect images (FIGS. 109 (c), 110 (a), and FIG. 111 (a), FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (c) are displayed).

In step S1414-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the ending effect pattern of the ending effect currently being performed is the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4, or ED-9. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4 or ED-9 is present, the process is transferred to step S1414-10, and the sub CPU 102a is not the ending effect pattern ED-3, ED-4 or ED-9. If it is determined, the effect mode setting process is terminated.

In step S1414-10, the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode G. Specifically, the effect mode flag "05H" indicating the effect mode G is stored in the effect mode flag storage area.

In step S1414-11, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode effect control command representing the effect mode set in step S1414-10 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

The effect mode effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect mode effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect in the effect mode indicated by the effect mode effect control command. The effect content is preset in each effect mode, and when the effect mode is set, at least the background image display displayed in the display area 130 of the image display device 13 and the BGM output from the audio output device 14 It is executed as a basic effect by the output and effect mode.

(Ending production pattern determination table)
FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (g) are diagrams showing an ending effect pattern determination table selected (referenced) when the ending effect pattern in the second embodiment is determined.

FIG. 116A is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 1 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when the big hit or the small hit is won is the effect mode A or the effect mode G. be.
FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 2 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode B.
FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 3 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode C.
FIG. 116 (d) is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 4 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode D.
FIG. 116 (e) is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 5 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode E.
FIG. 116 (f) is a diagram showing an ending effect pattern determination table 6 selected (referenced) when the effect mode set when a big hit or a small hit is won is the effect mode F.
FIG. 116 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C) in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won. -3, It is a figure which shows the ending effect pattern determination table 7 which is selected (referenced) when VS reach D-1 to D-3 are stored.

The ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (g) corresponds to the special symbol determination result, the special game ending designation command from the main control board 101, the ending effect pattern, and the presence / absence of the operation valid period. Attached, the production content of the ending effect is described as a reference.

The ending effect pattern ED-1 shown in FIG. 116 (a) is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 1 is executed. be. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-1, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-2 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 2 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-2, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-3 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the third big hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect 3 is executed.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-4 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when a small hit is won when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, and the ending effect for the small hit is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-5 and the ending effect pattern ED-6 shown in FIG. 116 (b) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode B is set, and the first jackpot When all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-6 Is selected, and the special ending effect 1 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-5 is selected and the ending effect 4 is executed. .. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-5 and the ending effect pattern ED-6, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-7 and the ending effect pattern ED-8 are ending effect patterns when the second jackpot is won when the effect mode B is set, and the effect is produced when the second jackpot is won. When all the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the mode B are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-8 is selected and special. Execute ending effect 2. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3) associated with the effect mode B are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-7 is selected and the ending effect 5 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-7 and the ending effect pattern ED-8, the operation valid period is not set, and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-9 is selected when the third big hit is won when the effect mode B, the effect mode C, the effect mode D, the effect mode E, and the effect mode F are set, and the ending effect 6 is selected. It is an ending effect pattern that executes.

The ending effect pattern ED-10 and the ending effect pattern ED-11 shown in FIG. 116 (c) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode C is set, and the first jackpot When all the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED- 11 is selected and the special ending effect 3 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-10 is selected and the ending effect 7 is executed. .. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-10 and the ending effect pattern ED-11, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-12 and the ending effect pattern ED-13 are ending effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode C is set, and the effect is produced when the second big hit is won. When all VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the mode C are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-13 is selected and special. The ending effect 4 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach C-1 to C-3) associated with the effect mode C are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-12 is selected and the ending effect 8 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-12 and the ending effect pattern ED-13, the operation valid period is not set, and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect.

The ending effect pattern ED-14 and the ending effect pattern ED-15 shown in FIG. 116 (d) are ending effect patterns when the first jackpot is won when the effect mode D is set, and the first jackpot When all VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D at the time of winning are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-15 is stored. Is selected, and the special ending effect 5 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-14 is selected and the ending effect 9 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-14 and the ending effect pattern ED-15, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-16 and the ending effect pattern ED-17 are ending effect patterns when the second big hit is won when the effect mode D is set, and the effect is produced when the second big hit is won. When all VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the mode D are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the ending effect pattern ED-17 is selected and special. The ending effect 6 is executed. On the other hand, when all of the VS reach (VS reach D-1 to D-3) associated with the effect mode D are not stored, the ending effect pattern ED-16 is selected and the ending effect 10 is executed. ..
Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-16 and the ending effect pattern ED-17, the operation valid period is not set, and the effect mode selection effect is not performed during the ending effect.

The ending effect pattern ED-18 shown in FIG. 116 (e) is a special game effect pattern that is selected when the first big hit is won when the effect mode E is set, and the ending effect 11 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-18, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-19 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode E is set, and the ending effect 12 is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-20 shown in FIG. 116 (f) is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the first big hit is won when the effect mode F is set, and the ending effect 13 is executed. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-20, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

Further, the ending effect pattern ED-21 is an ending effect pattern that is selected when the second big hit is won when the effect mode F is set, and the ending effect 14 is executed.

The ending effect pattern ED-22 shown in FIG. 116 (g) shows all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, VS reach C-1 to C-3, VS reach) when the first jackpot is won. This is an ending effect pattern that is selected when D-1 to D-3) are stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c and executes the special ending effect 7. Further, in the ending effect pattern ED-22, the operation valid period is set, and the effect mode selection effect is performed during the ending effect.

In addition, the ending effect pattern ED-23 provides all VS reach (VS reach B-1 to B-3, C-1 to C-3, D-1 to D-3) when the second jackpot is won. This is an ending effect pattern that is selected when stored in the VS reach storage area of the sub RAM 102c and executes the special ending effect 8.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the effect mode selection effect is the ending effect (ending effects 1, 4, 7, 9, 11 and 13 and the special ending effects 1, 3) when the first jackpot is won. 5, 7), and when the effect mode A or the effect mode G is set, that is, when the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not set, the first jackpot and the second jackpot (so-called first jackpot). It is designed to be performed during the ending effect (ending effect 1 and 2) when the winning) is won.
That is, in the second embodiment, the execution of the "effect mode selection effect" of the first embodiment is restricted in that the execution of the "effect mode selection effect" is restricted in the ending effect when the second big hit is won. The conditions are different.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select (set) the effect mode after the jackpot game from a plurality of effect modes having different characteristics, so that the player can play the game in the effect mode desired by the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About other inventions and the like described in the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions and the like described in the above embodiments will be described.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233453), an operation promotion effect for urging a player to operate the effect button is performed during the operation valid period of the effect button, and the operation state of the effect button is changed to a normal state. An operation state (protruding state, retracted state, rotating state, or vibration state) different from the state is set, and a specific effect image, effect sound, or lamp emission is used to execute a specific operation-compatible effect based on the operation of the effect button. Was. However, among the gaming machines, there are gaming machines that set not only the operation valid period for performing the operation promotion notification but also the operation valid period for not performing the operation promotion notification, and the operation promotion is performed in such a gaming machine. No consideration was given to how the state of the operating means should be between the operation valid period and the operation valid period in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. Therefore, the purpose is to improve the interest of the player by using the operation means.

As a first configuration for achieving the above object, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the player can operate the gaming machine Y, and the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)). And an operation means (effect button 17A (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to a second state (protrusion (or vibration, red color, etc.)) different from the first state, and an operation on the operation means. Effective operation A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation means during the effective state, and the effect control means is provided to the player. In the first operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and the operation promotion notification is not performed. In the second operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state, the operating means is set to the first state, but is not set to the second state.

Further, as a second configuration for achieving the above object, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the player can operate the gaming machine Y, and the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)). ), An operation means (effect button 17A (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to a second state (protrusion (or vibration, red color, etc.)) different from the first state, and an operation on the operation means is effective. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU 102a) that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation means during the operation enabled state, and the effect control means is related to a game. In the first operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the operating means is performed during the execution of the game effect, the operating means is set to the first state or the second state. In the second operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed, the operating means is set to the first state, while the second state is restricted. I have to.

By adopting these first to second configurations, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by using the operating means.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99635), after the end of the special gaming state, until the number of times the symbol changes reaches a predetermined upper limit, the normal gaming state is reached. The change time of the symbol in the first half of the period (probability change A state) during the transition to the privilege game state (probability change state), which makes it easier to shift to the special game state, is the privilege game state. The fluctuation pattern was specified so as to be relatively shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol in the latter half section (probability change B state) of. However, no consideration has been given to how to set an effect using an operation means such as an effect button during the variable effect in the specific game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, the purpose is to improve the interest of the player by using the operation means.

As a configuration for achieving the above object, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a determination means (main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition. ), And the special game control means (main CPU101a) that executes the special game by determining that the special game is to be executed by the determination means, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. Based on the specific game state setting means (main CPU101a) that sets a specific game state advantageous to the player, the operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the effect button 17A), and the determination result by the determination means. It is a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (sub CPU 102a) that performs a variation effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result, and the effect control means is effective for the operation of the operation means in the variation effect. A predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the operating means during the operation valid state, and the specific game is performed at a higher rate than the first period in the specific game state after the end of the special game. In the second period after the first period in the state, the operation valid state is set during the variation effect.
Further, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, the operating means has a first state (non-projection (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)) and a second state (protrusion (or projection)) different from the first state. The effect control means can be changed to vibration, red color, etc.)), and the effect control means is effective in the operation in which the operation means is set to the second state in the second period at a higher rate than the first period. I try to set the state.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by using the operating means.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-188506), when there is an operation input via the operation button when the player is instructed to operate the button. In addition, productions suggesting changes in the playing state, such as the occurrence of big hits in the future and the production of characters, were performed. However, if such a mere operation of the operation button is an opportunity to execute an effect suggesting a change in the expectation of a big hit or a change in the gaming state, the effect of the effect may be poor. Therefore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there is a problem that a game machine is required to have an opportunity to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit, which is not limited to the mere operation of the operation buttons.

As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is performed when the starting condition is satisfied. When it is determined by the special game determination means to control the special game, the special game control means for executing the control of the special game and the symbol are variablely displayed and stopped. Thereby, the symbol display means for notifying the determination result by the special game determination means, the operation means (effect button 17A) that can be operated by the player, the drive means that can drive the operation means, and the operation. A voice output means (voice output device 14) capable of outputting a pseudo drive sound of the means, an image display means (image display device 13) capable of displaying an image representing the operation means, and an effect according to the progress of the game. The effect control means includes an effect control means (sub CPU 102a) for controlling the above, and the effect control means performs a predetermined drive of the operation means by the drive means and a voice output during the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means. The degree of expectation that the determination result by the special game determination means is to perform the special game by any one of the output of the predetermined sound by the means and the display of the predetermined image by the image display means or a combination thereof. I'm trying to be different.

Further, as a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, if the starting condition is satisfied, whether to control the special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player. The player can operate the special game determining means for determining whether or not the special game, and the special game control means for executing the control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determining means to control the special game. A first operating means (effect button 17A), a second operating means (effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means. The operation effect control means is provided with an operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the above, and a game state control means for controlling the game in a normal game state or a specific game state different from the normal game state. In the means, when the gaming state control means controls the game in the normal gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operating means is the operation for prompting the operation of the second operating means. When the game state control means controls the game in the specific gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is higher than the ratio of performing the effect. It is set to be higher than the ratio of performing the operation effect that encourages the operation of.

Further, as a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, if the starting condition is satisfied, whether to control the special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player. The player can operate the special game determining means for determining whether or not the special game, and the special game control means for executing the control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determining means to control the special game. A first operating means (effect button 17A), a second operating means (effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means. The operation effect control means is provided with an operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the above, and a game state control means for controlling the game in a normal game state or a specific game state different from the normal game state. When the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state, the means is the first operation as compared with the case where the game state control means controls the game in the normal game state. The ratio of performing operation effects that encourage the operation of means is set to be low.

Further, as a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, if the starting condition is satisfied, whether to control the special game (big hit game) which is advantageous for the player. The player can operate the special game determining means for determining whether or not the special game, and the special game control means for executing the control of the special game when it is determined by the special game determining means to control the special game. A first operating means (effect button 17A), a second operating means (effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operating means, and the first operating means and the second operating means. The effect control means is provided with an operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the above, and a game state control means for controlling the game in a normal game state or a specific game state different from the normal game state. When the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state, the second operation means is more than when the game state control means controls the game in the normal game state. The ratio of performing operation effects that encourage the operation of is high.

By adopting these first to fourth configurations, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120904), a high probability state in which the probability that the display result becomes the specific display result after the end of the specific gaming state is higher than that in the normal probability state. There is a first specific gaming state that shifts to, and a second specific gaming state in which the probability that the display result becomes a specific display result after the end of the specific gaming state shifts to the normal probability state, and it is specified after the end of the first specific gaming state. It is controlled to the effect mode, and when the second specific game state is reached during the specific effect mode, the specific effect mode is terminated. However, although the production mode is switched with the specific game as an opportunity, there is a problem that the game is not interesting because the player cannot select the desired production mode.

As the first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) that gives a predetermined benefit to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination and performs the special game based on the result of the special game determination, the display means displays a plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner and then displays the special game. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) for performing a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode indicating a determination result of the special game determination is provided, and the variable effect is provided with a first effect mode (effect modes B, D, E) and a second effect mode (effect mode C) are provided, and an effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) for setting the first effect mode or the second effect mode is further provided, and the variable effect is the plurality of the above-mentioned variable effects. A plurality of identification symbols of the same type among the identification symbols are stopped and displayed, and the special game determination is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reach state in which one identification symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. A reach effect that produces a stop display in a stop mode that indicates a determination result, and a reach confirmation effect that notifies that the reach effect is performed (for example, special modes 2 to 5 of the reserved image and telop notice patterns 5 to 8). ), And the effect control means is set to the second effect mode by the effect mode setting means at a higher rate than when the first effect mode is set. I try to do.

Further, as a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) for performing a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode indicating the determination result of the special game determination is provided, and the variable effect is provided with a first effect mode (effect mode B, effect mode B, C, E) and a second effect mode (effect mode D) are provided, and the effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) for setting the first effect mode or the second effect mode is further provided, and the variable effect is Including a special effect (for example, special mode 5 of the reserved image, telop notice pattern 8) which is executed at a lower rate than other variable effects, the effect control means is the second effect by the effect mode setting means. When the mode is set, the special effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first effect mode is set.

Further, as a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode that later shows the determination result of the special game determination, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. A specific gaming state setting means (main CPU101a) for setting a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player is provided, and there are a plurality of types of variable effects performed in the specific gaming state. There are effect modes (effect modes B, C, D, E), further comprising an effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) for setting any one of a plurality of types of the effect modes, and the effect control means is in the specific gaming state. In the first period (for example, the number of changes of the special symbol is up to 74 times) when it is set to, the variation effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is performed, and the specific gaming state is performed. In the second period (for example, the number of times the special symbol is changed is 75 times or more) when the value is set to, a common fluctuation effect is performed.

Further, as a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode that later shows the determination result of the special game determination, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. A specific gaming state setting means (main CPU101a) for setting a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player is provided, and there are a plurality of types of variable effects performed in the specific gaming state. There are effect modes (effect modes B, C, D), and the plurality of types of the effect mode include a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, VS reach effect) corresponding to each of the effect modes, and any one of the plurality of types. When any one of a plurality of types of the specific effect is executed in the effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) set to the effect mode and the variable effect determined to perform the special game, the specified effect is executed. The effect storage mode setting means is further provided with an information storage means (sub RAM 102c) for storing information that can specify the type of the above, and the effect mode setting means is determined by the special game determination to perform the special game in the normal game state. If, while setting the effect mode setting period in which any of the plurality of types of the effect mode can be set, in the specific gaming state, predetermined conditions (for example, winning the first jackpot, specific timing) When the operation means is operated, the number of times the jackpot is won exceeds a specific number of times, all VS reach is memorized, etc.), any of the above-mentioned production modes of a plurality of types is established. The production mode setting period that can be set is set.

Further, as a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode that later shows the determination result of the special game determination, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. A specific gaming state setting means (main CPU101a) for setting a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player is provided, and there are a plurality of types of variable effects performed in the specific gaming state. There are effect modes (effect modes B, C, D, E), and the plurality of types of the effect modes are the first effect of executing a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, VS reach effect) corresponding to each of the effect modes. An effect mode setting means (effect mode setting means) that includes a mode (effect mode B, C, D) and a second effect mode (effect mode E) that does not execute the specific effect, and is set to the first effect mode or the second effect mode. When the specific effect of any of a plurality of types is executed in the sub CPU 102a) and the variable effect determined to perform the special game, information that can specify the type of the executed specific effect is stored. Based on the information storage means (sub RAM 102c) and the information stored in the information storage means, which is determined to perform the special game in the first effect mode, the image display device is used as an effect during the special game. In the above, a special game effect executing means (sub CPU 102a) for performing a specific special game effect (special jackpot effect 1 to 8) different from the normal special game effect (big hit effect 1 to 14) is further provided.

Further, as a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether to perform a special game (big hit game) that gives a predetermined benefit to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination of whether or not to perform the special game determination and performs the special game based on the result of the special game determination, the display means changes a plurality of identification symbols (special effect symbols). An effect control means (sub CPU102a) for performing a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode showing the determination result of the special game determination after the display is provided, and the variable effect is provided with a first effect mode (1st effect mode). There are an effect mode B, D, E) and a second effect mode (effect mode C), further comprising an effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) for setting the first effect mode or the second effect mode. The variation effect is a predetermined time after the reach state is set in which a plurality of identification symbols of the same type among the plurality of identification symbols are stopped and displayed, and one identification symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. After a lapse of time, a reach effect is performed until the stop display is displayed in a stop mode indicating the determination result of the special game determination, and a reach confirmation effect for notifying that the reach effect is performed (for example, special modes 2 to the reserved image). 5. When the effect control means is set to the first effect mode when it is set to the second effect mode by the effect mode setting means, including 5 and telop notice patterns 5 to 8). The reach confirmation effect is performed at a higher ratio, and the display mode of the identification symbol is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Further, as a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not it is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, a plurality of identification symbols (special effect symbols) are displayed on the display means. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) for performing a variation effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode showing the determination result of the special game determination after performing the variation display is provided, and the variation effect includes a first effect mode. There are (effect mode B, C, E) and a second effect mode (effect mode D), and the effect mode setting means (sub CPU 102a) for setting the first effect mode or the second effect mode is further provided. The variation effect includes a special effect (for example, special mode 5 of the reserved image, telop notice pattern 8) which is executed at a lower rate than other variation effects, and the effect control means is the effect mode setting means. When the second effect mode is set, the special effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first effect mode is set, and the identification symbol is used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The display mode of is different.

Further, as an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the second embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode that later shows the determination result of the special game determination, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. A specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player is provided, and a plurality of types of effect modes (effect modes B, C, D, E) are provided for the variable effect performed in the specific game state. There is further provided with an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode to any one of a plurality of types, and the special game has the predetermined profit as compared with the first special game (first big hit) and the first special game. The first special game is the case where the effect mode setting means is determined by the special game determination to perform the first special game in the specific game state. Then, while setting the effect mode setting period in which any of the plurality of types of the effect mode can be set, the case where the special game determination determines that the second special game is to be performed in the specific game state. In the second special game, the setting of the effect mode setting period is restricted.

By adopting these first to eighth configurations, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-189088), when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes the special display result, the type of the special display result is included. The history information is stored, and the stored hit history information is displayed on the image display device. However, since the stored hit history information is only displayed on the image display device, there is a problem that the game is not interesting.

According to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment as the first configuration for solving the above problem, whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) that gives a predetermined benefit to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition. When the special game determination is made in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination of the above and performs the special game based on the result of the special game determination, the special game is displayed after the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode indicating a determination result of the game determination, and after the end of the special game, the player is compared with the normal game state. The variable effect includes a specific game state setting means (main CPU 101a) for setting an advantageous specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state), and the variable effect is a plurality of types of specific effects that can be executed in the specific game state. When any one of a plurality of types of the specific effect is executed in the variable effect determined to perform the special game, including (for example, VS reach effect), the type of the executed specific effect can be specified. Based on the information storage means (sub RAM 102c) for storing information and the information stored in the information storage means, a normal special game effect (big hit effect 1 to 14) is performed in the image display device as an effect during the special game. ) Is further provided with a special game effect executing means (sub CPU 102a) that performs a specific special game effect (special jackpot effect 1 to 8), and the effect control means is stored in the information storage means in the variable effect. Based on the above-mentioned information, the executed specific effect has a lower execution ratio than the other specific effects.

Further, as a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, a special game (big hit game) in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition is performed. When the special game determination is performed in the gaming machine that executes the special game determination as to whether or not the special game is performed and the special game is performed based on the result of the special game determination, the display means performs variable display of a plurality of identification symbols. An effect control means (sub CPU102a) that performs a variable effect of stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a stop mode that later shows the determination result of the special game determination, and after the end of the special game, as compared with the normal game state. A specific game state setting means (main CPU101a) for setting a specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) advantageous to the player is provided, and the variation effect can be performed in a plurality of types that can be executed in the specific game state. When any one of a plurality of types of the specific effect is executed in the variable effect determined to perform the special game, including the specific effect (for example, VS reach effect), the type of the executed specific effect is determined. An information storage means (sub RAM 102c) for storing identifiable information is further provided, the effect control means is based on the information stored in the information storage means, and the specific effect executed is the special game. In the variation effect after the end, if it is not determined by the special game determination that the special game is to be performed, it is not executed.

By adopting these first to second configurations, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jiyan ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Y gaming machine 6 1st starting port 6a 1st starting port detection sensor 7 2nd starting port 7a 2nd starting port detection sensor 8 Grand winning port 9 1st winning gate 10 2nd winning gate 13 Image display device 16A 1st decorative member (Movable member)
16B 2nd decorative member (movable member)
16C 3rd decorative member (movable member)
17A Effect button 18A Select button 19A Effect lever 70 Second start port control device 80 Grand prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b main ROM
101c main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c sub RAM

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a special game determination as to whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition.
An effect control means that performs a variable effect using a plurality of identification symbols in the display means,
After the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state, and a specific game state setting means.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
The effect control means is
When controlled in the normal gaming state, the first reach effect can be executed in the variable effect.
When controlled in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a second reach effect different from the first reach effect in the variable effect.
The operation means without the operation of the operation means in the case where the second reach effect in which the special game is executed is executed than in the case where the first reach effect in which the special game is not executed is executed. Is easy to perform a vibration effect that vibrates in a predetermined mode,
The operating means
There is a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means.
When the second reach effect is executed, it is easier to execute the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operating means than when the first reach effect is executed.
The vibration effect is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed without an operation effect for encouraging the operation of the first operating means and the second operating means.

Images